(155,'0','seo','admin','&lt;p&gt;The Stockbox SEO feature concentrates on optimizing the dynamic content of your Stockbox system which will allow the major search engines like Google, Yahoo, MSN, etc... to crawl your site more effectively and therefore add more content to their databases.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;There are two main components to this feature:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Dynamic meta tags for the Media Details and Category page headers.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Search Engine Friendly and Optimized URLs (SEF URL).&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;1. DYNAMIC META TAGS FOR THE MEDIA DETAILS AND CATEGORY PAGE HEADERS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;With this feature, your static &lt;strong&gt;Page Title&lt;/strong&gt;, &lt;strong&gt;Meta Keywords&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;Meta Description&lt;/strong&gt; on the Media Details and &lt;span lang=&quot;en-ca&quot;&gt;Category &lt;/span&gt;page headers will be automatically changed to the content of your selected media properties. There are seven options available and your selection will depend on which data you have added to the respective database fields.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;margin-left: 20px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;System Name&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Display Name&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Description&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Author&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Copyright&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Keywords&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;IPTC metadata \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;margin-left: 20px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;All available fields&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Page Header Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;To change the media property displayed for the page title, meta keywords and meta description tags, please follow the steps below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;ol style=&quot;margin-left: 20px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;You can select the desired media property for each tag in the &lt;strong&gt;Media Page Header Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save your changes.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Category Page Header Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;To change the media property displayed for the page title, meta keywords and meta description tags, please follow the steps below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;ol style=&quot;margin-left: 20px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;You can select the desired media property for each tag in the &lt;strong&gt;Category Page Header Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save your changes.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Changing the default meta tag content&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Stockbox SEO will use the default content in the following instances:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;margin-left: 20px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;On any other pages except the Media Details or the Category pages.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;If the current media properties content is empty.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;PADDING-LEFT: 30px&quot;&gt;The default meta tag content can be edited in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Meta Tag Default Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; section of the General Configuration.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;PADDING-LEFT: 30px&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;2. SEARCH ENGINE FRIENDLY AND OPTIMIZED URLs&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Stockbox SEO will change all static &amp;amp; dynamic URLs that are generated by Stockbox to Search Engine Friendly URLs (SEF URLs). For example, the URL to go to the category listing page is http://&amp;lt;your-stockbox-path&amp;gt;&lt;strong&gt;/index.php?module=media&amp;amp;pId=100&amp;amp;category=gallery/Abstracts&lt;/strong&gt; and with the SEO feature enabled it will be changed to http://&amp;lt;your-stockbox-page&amp;gt;&lt;strong&gt;/index/gallery/Abstracts&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Please Note&lt;/strong&gt;: If you added any relative URL to the gallery templates (any URL that aren&#039;t generated by Stockbox and don&#039;t contain the full domain name, e.g. href=&quot;index.html&quot;), the system may return &lt;strong&gt;Page Not Found, Error 404&lt;/strong&gt; because the relative URL will be appended at the end of the current SEF URL, which will make server recognize it as an invalid path. Therefore, to ensure that everything functions correctly, please follow the directions below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;margin-left: 20px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Please change all relative URLs in the HTML tags &lt;strong&gt;&amp;lt;a href=&quot;&amp;lt;your-URL&amp;gt;&quot;&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;&amp;lt;form action=&quot;&amp;lt;your-URL&amp;gt;&quot;&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;gt; to absolute URLs.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Please make sure that all of your HTML codes that contain URLs like &amp;lt;a&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;form&amp;gt; tags follow the standard style: &lt;strong&gt;&lt;em&gt;&amp;lt;a href=&quot;&amp;lt;your-absolute-URL&amp;gt;&quot;&amp;gt;&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and &amp;lt;form name=&quot;&amp;lt;your-form-name&amp;gt;&quot; method=&quot;&amp;lt;your-method&amp;gt;&quot;&lt;em&gt;&lt;strong&gt; action=&quot;&amp;lt;your-absolute-URL&amp;gt;&quot;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/em&gt;&amp;gt;. e.g. &amp;lt;a href=&quot;http://www.domain.com/index.html&quot; or &amp;lt;form name=&quot;form1&quot; method=&quot;post&quot; action=&quot;http://www.domain.com/process.php&quot;&amp;gt;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;a. Enable/Disable Stockbox SEO&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;Please follow the steps below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;ol style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Stockbox SEO&lt;/strong&gt; link in the main menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;On the &lt;strong&gt;Stockbox SEO&lt;/strong&gt; page, check the &lt;strong&gt;Enable SEO&lt;/strong&gt; checkbox to enable the Stockbox SEO feature, un-check to disable the Stockbox SEO feature. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: enable or disable Stockbox SEO won&#039;t affect the &lt;strong&gt;Media Details Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;. If you want to disable the Media Details page title, meta description and meta keywords, simply select &lt;strong&gt;----None----&lt;/strong&gt; in the respective dropdown boxes.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Please make sure the &lt;strong&gt;RewriteEngine&lt;/strong&gt; parameter in the Stockbox root directory&#039;s &lt;strong&gt;.htaccess&lt;/strong&gt; is &lt;strong&gt;On&lt;/strong&gt;. It&#039;s On by default.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save your changes.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;b. Using - Tailing Keywords&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Tailing Keywords are the extra keywords that will be appended to the end of all media and category URLs. This will provide the search bots with more data from your URLs to store in their databases, resulting in more effective SEO. Stockbox SEO will fetch Tailing Keywords based on the media property content of the current user&#039;s selected language. If it is empty, Stockbox SEO will use &lt;strong&gt;English&lt;/strong&gt; instead.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To configure the Tailing Keywords feature, please follow the steps below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Stockbox SEO&lt;/strong&gt; link in the main menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;In the &lt;strong&gt;Tailing Keywords&lt;/strong&gt; section, please configure the following options:&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Tailing keywords for media URLs:&lt;/strong&gt; Choose the data option that you want the system to append to the end of the media URL.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Tailing keywords for category URLs:&lt;/strong&gt; Choose the data option that you want the system to append to the end of the category URL.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Tailing Keywords Separator:&lt;/strong&gt; Choose the symbol that you want the system to use to separate all appended keywords. If the Tailing Keywords string contains spaces or invalid characters, this symbol is also used to replace them. e.g. If you choose the &quot;_&quot; (underscore) to be the separator, and the string is &quot;&lt;strong&gt;These are$the?Tailing~Keywords&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;, it will become &quot;&lt;strong&gt;These_are_the_Tailling_Keywords&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Tailing Keywords Limitation:&lt;/strong&gt; If your Tailing Keywords string is too long, you can limit the number of characters that will be displayed. Set this option value to 0 to disable the limitation. e.g. If your Tailing Keywords string is &quot;Hello_world&quot; and the Limitation value is 5, then the final output string will become &quot;Hello&quot;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Please make sure Stockbox SEO is enabled, then click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save your changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;c. Using - Remove Stopwords&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;Most Search Engines do not consider extremely common words in their indexing in order to save disk space and/or to speed up their search results. These filtered words are known as &quot;Stopwords&quot;. Stockbox SEO will remove all Stopwords from the Tailing Keywords strings before displaying them.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;To configure the Remove Stopwords feature, please follow the steps below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;ol style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Stockbox SEO&lt;/strong&gt; link in the main menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;In the &lt;strong&gt;Remove Stopwords&lt;/strong&gt; section, please configure the following options:&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Remove Stopwords:&lt;/strong&gt; Use this option to Enable or Disable the Remove Stopwords feature.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Stopwords List:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter your Stopwords into this text box. Each word is separated by the carriage return (Press Enter key).&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Please make sure Stockbox SEO is enabled, then click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;font-weight: bold; margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;d. Using - Keywords Translating&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;This feature is used for translating characters, words and/or phrases of the Tailing Keywords strings to the other languages. This is useful if Stockbox will have multiple languages displayed and you need for example all Spanish or German special characters to be translated to the suitable Latin characters. e.g. If a Tailing Keywords string has an &quot;Espa&amp;ntilde;ol&quot; word and you add a translating entry for &lt;strong&gt;&amp;ntilde;&lt;/strong&gt; to &lt;strong&gt;n&lt;/strong&gt;, this word will become &quot;Espanol&quot;.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To configure the Keywords Translating feature, please follow the steps below:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol style=&quot;margin-left: 40px;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Stockbox SEO&lt;/strong&gt; link in the main menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;In the &lt;strong&gt;Keywords Translating&lt;/strong&gt; section, please fill in the following fields.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;From:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter the original character, word or phrase that needs to be translated. This value is case sensitive.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;To:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter the translating character, word or phrase. This value is case sensitive.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language:&lt;/strong&gt; Choose the language that the translating entry will be applied to.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; title=&quot;Add&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to create the entry.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;You can click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; title=&quot;Delete&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to delete an entry.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(156,'100','config','admin','&lt;p&gt;The General Configuration section contains some of the main gallery configuration settings.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Using the General Configuration section&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Mail Server Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Stockbox can use either of&amp;nbsp; two methods to send out mail. The &lt;strong&gt;Default Mail Server&lt;/strong&gt; or &lt;strong&gt;SMTP Server.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Default Mail Server&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Stockbox recommends that you use the default mail server to send out mail to customers. No options are needed if you select to use the default mail server. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: #000000;&quot;&gt;SMTP Server&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;If for some reason you don&#039;t have a mail system installed on your server, you can use the SMTP method. The system will need a little more time to send out emails if you are using this method. It needs time to connect to the &lt;strong&gt;SMTP Server&lt;/strong&gt; before sending out emails. To use this method, select &lt;strong&gt;SMTP Server&lt;/strong&gt; in the drop down list and fill in all the information for your SMTP mail server configuration in the text fields. Click the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; /&gt; icon to test the connection before saving the settings. If the entered info is correct, you will receive an email that is sent to the email address in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Notification Email Address&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; text field.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Cookie Manager&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When a customer visits the gallery, a cookie is saved on the customer&#039;s computer to keep track of their actions. Stockbox uses this cookie for the shopping cart and the lightbox session id.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Cookie Lifespan (in days)&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The time that the cookie will last on the customer&#039;s computer. The time is reset whenever the customer returns to the gallery. To change the lifespan of the cookies that are set by the system, enter a new value here.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;User Session&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Stockbox will automatically logout customers after the specified time has elapsed. This will prevent unauthorized access if the customer does not logout.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Session Timeout (In Minutes)&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the desired value here. The default value is 30 minutes. &lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Execution Memory Limit&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When the system is executing functions, it needs memory to allocate data. By default, the system is only able to allocate the memory buffer that is configured in the servers php.ini file. Sometimes, the system needs a larger memory buffer to execute a function like zipping all download files. You may need to increase this number to a larger value to avoid a memory allocation problem. Depending on your server&#039;s configuration, it may not allow you to set the memory buffer during run time, but most servers do allow it. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Download Manager&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Download Link Verification on Purchase&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;If this option is enabled and the product type is assigned with a instant download link, the system will check to make sure the assigned download link exists on the server. If it doesn&#039;t exist on the server, users will not able to purchase this product type. This option only works when the display and download files are on the same server where the Stockbox software is installed, it will not work with the Remote FTP server feature.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Maximum Download Zip Limit File Size When using memory buffer&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This number will vary depending on your server and PHP &quot;memory limit&quot; configuration. When users are trying to download their order, the system will zip all of the downloaded files in the order and store them to the server memory. If the download files are large and your server has insufficient resources to handle them, the server will return an error. To prevent this from occurring, the system will zip all of the files when it detects that the download file size exceeds this configured value to the actual zip file on your server instead of using the server memory to allocate these files. This method will take longer than the Memory Allocation method and it will use extra space on your server to store the zip package, but it will prevent the out of memory issue. &lt;strong&gt;The default number is 32MB&lt;/strong&gt; and if you experience an out of memory issues at this setting you should&lt;strong&gt; reduce&lt;/strong&gt; this value. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove download links after # of days &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Input the number of days that you want the system to maintain the active download links in the user&#039;s &quot;My Account&quot; area. After the specified number of days, the system will de-activate the links. The number of days are counted from the day after the customer made their purchase.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Download Readme File&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;You can specify the readme file that will be included with the zipped download file(s). The system will list all files in the ./template/language-name/ folder in the dropdown menu. By Default, it will ignore any files with a &quot;tpl&quot;, &quot;html&quot;, and &quot;css&quot; file type extension. If you would like to use one of these file types. then you will need to remove it from the IGNORE_README_EXT variable in the ./config/config.inc.php file.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Registration configuration&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;The system will use these configurations during the customer and photographer (Ent. version) registrations.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Notify me when someone signs up&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;To be notified when some one signs up (registers), check this box, otherwise leave it un-checked. The notification email will be sent to the email address that is entered in the &amp;ldquo;&lt;strong&gt;Notification Email Address&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;rdquo; field. The notification email contents can be modified by editing the &lt;strong&gt;notify.tpl&lt;/strong&gt; template in the template section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Notification Email Address &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;The system will use this email address to send the notification email when a new user signs up.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Webmaster Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;The system will use this name for the notification email.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Invoice Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions) &lt;br /&gt;The system will use these configurations upon the completion of a customer&#039;s order.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Notification Invoice Email&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;If this box is checked, an invoice will be sent via email to you and to the customer when an order is completed. To &lt;strong&gt;disable&lt;/strong&gt; this feature, un-check the box. The invoice email contents can be modified by editing the &lt;strong&gt;invoice.tpl&lt;/strong&gt; template in the template section&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable bcc Invoice&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;To bcc (blind carbon copy) the invoice email to another email address, tick this checkbox.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;bcc Invoice Email Address&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;Enter the email address where the bcc email will be sent. This feature could be used to automatically send a copy of the invoice to your print shop or order fulfillment centre. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Mobile Notification Email Address&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the email address for your mobile phone. The system will send a new order notification to the mobile phone email address that you input. You can obtain the mobile phone email address through your service provider.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Show Invoice Thumbnail&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;By checking this box, a thumbnail image will display on the invoice. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Show Media Path&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;By checking this box, the category path will display on the invoice. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Invoice Start Number&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the starting value for the invoice number. The system will use this number as the starting value when a new order is created in the system. Any subsequent order will have the invoice number increased by one.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Send To Friend&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;bcc Admin a copy of SEND TO FRIEND email &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Check this box to have a blind carbon copy of the sent message emailed to your notification email address.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable SEND TO FRIEND Logs&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enable, the system will log the SEND TO FRIEND email to the database. You can view the log detail in the &lt;strong&gt;Media Manager&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Send To Friend Logs&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;Lightbox Manager&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;file:///C:/Documents/Download/5_beta/beta_500/Help_Menu_5.00/images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; width=&quot;7&quot; height=&quot;7&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Send Lightbox Logs&lt;/strong&gt; sections.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Date Format Configuration&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Date Format:&lt;/strong&gt; There are two types of date format that you can choose from.&lt;br /&gt;mm/dd/yyyy: The date will be displayed in &lt;strong&gt;month/day/year&lt;/strong&gt; format. &lt;br /&gt;dd/mm/yyyy: The date will be displayed in &lt;strong&gt;day/month/year &lt;/strong&gt;format. &lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Slide Show Configuration &lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Slide Show&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;To enable slide show in your gallery, tick this checkbox. Otherwise leave it unchecked.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Slide Show Timeout&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a value as desired (the value must be numeric). The lower the number, the faster the images are changed in the slide show. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Slide Show Media Limitation&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When users activate the slide show, the system will query all images in the selected category and output that data to the browser. If the selected category contains many images and your server has a low memory limit, it will return an error. To prevent this issue, you should enable this option. When this option is enabled, the system will only query the images on the current page for the slide show instead of the entire selected category of images.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency Configuration&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency Symbol&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the desired currency symbol to be used. This currency symbol will be used throughout the system&lt;strong&gt;.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency Symbol Prefix&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Before Price: The system will display the currency symbol before the price.&lt;br /&gt;After Price: the system will display the currency symbol after the price.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency Decimal Separator&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Choose the symbol you want to separate the decimal part of the price for your currency (e.g. 10.00 or 10,00)&lt;strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Default Payment Method Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Payment Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Choose the Payment Options for your site. There are three options available as follows.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;PPP Only: (Pay Per Purchase)&lt;/strong&gt; If this option is selected, the system will only allow users to pay when checking out their order.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Subscription Only&lt;/strong&gt;: If this option is selected, users are only able to checkout when they have purchased one of your subscription products and changed their Payment Method to the purchased subscription.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;PPP &amp;amp; Subscription&lt;/strong&gt;: If this option is selected, users are able to checkout regardless of whether they have purchased a subscription or not. The system will detect the appropriate payment method for your customer during the checkout process.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;span id=&quot;label_payment_method&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Default Payment Method&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Choose the default payment method for your site. This option is only available when you choose &lt;strong&gt;PPP &amp;amp; Subscription&lt;/strong&gt; for the Payment Option.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Subscription: &lt;/strong&gt;the system will use the subscription option as the default payment method. If users have subscribed to your subscription, it will use the active subscription for the purchase. If the customer&#039;s subscription will not cover the order total, then the system will provide a PPP option for them to continue to checkout.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;PPP:&lt;/strong&gt; the system will use the PPP (Pay Per Purchase) option as the default payment method. If users have subscribed to one of your subscriptions and they wish to use that for their purchase, then they will need to switch to the active subscription before being able to checkout with their prepaid subscription.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;System URL Path Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Landing Page&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the Stockbox Gallery Page for your gallery landing page. This page (URL) will be loaded when users click on the HOME link or button of the gallery or when the user enters the gallery using the URL..&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Stockbox Full URL Path&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;In order for the system to function correctly, this URL PATH must have a valid path. The system should obtain the FULL URL during the installation process, but for some reason your server may return an incorrect path. You should only modify this URL if it&#039;s incorrect. The correct path is: http://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-stockbox, no forward slash at the end of the URL.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;User Logout Redirect URL&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the FULL URL path where users will be redirected to upon logging out from their account. This URL will apply to all users, administrators, photographers and customers.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Home Public Breadcrumbs Link&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the path you want the &quot;Home&quot; breadcrumb link to be associated with. By default it will point to the index.php (main gallery page). If you want it to point to another page on your site, please enter the correct path into the input text field. Please provide the absolute path for Stockbox SEO compatibility. e.g. http://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-stockbox/index.php.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Meta Tag Default Configuration&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Page Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the default meta page title by clicking on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Edit&quot; /&gt; icon. The page title will be displayed at the top of your web browser. It will also display on the search results page of the search engines. The page title is an important part of effective SEO. With the Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions you can add &lt;span style=&quot;color: #000000;&quot;&gt;dynamic data&lt;/span&gt;&amp;nbsp;to the category and media page titles in your gallery. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Meta Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the default meta description by clicking on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Edit&quot; /&gt; icon. The meta description will be displayed on the search results page of the search engines. With the Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions you can add dynamic data to the category and media page meta descriptions in your gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Page Keywords&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the default meta keywords by clicking on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Edit&quot; /&gt; icon. With the Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions you can add dynamic data to the category and media page meta keywords in your gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Other Configurations&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable License Agreement Checkbox on Shopping Cart Page&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;By checking this box, the system will require users to tick the agreement checkbox on the shopping cart page before continuing to checkout their order. The agreement text can be edited in the Template Manager section. The template name is &quot;checkout_agreement.tpl&quot;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Individual Logout&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;By default system will unset all current sessions when you logout in the current session. This including admin section, gallery section and photographer section. If you wish system to log you out from the session that you&#039;re current using then tick this checkbox.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Offline Form Credit Card&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;There are three options that you can choose from in the dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Collect Credit Card &amp;amp; Other Payment Method&lt;/strong&gt;: When this option is selected, the system will provide an option in the Offline Form which allows users to choose to not provide credit card information. You should only use this option if you accept other payment methods such as a bank transfer or you allow your customers to pay by cheque (check).&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Collect Credit Card Only&lt;/strong&gt;: When this option is selected, the system requires users to enter credit card information in order to submit an order. The credit information is encrypted before being stored in the database. To view the customer&#039;s credit card information you will need to go to the Order Manager section and click on the &quot;Complete&quot; or &quot;Processing&quot; hyperlink in the status column for the particular order. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove Credit Card Option&lt;/strong&gt;: When this option is selected, the system will remove the credit card section from the Offline Form so that users are not required to enter their credit card info in order to submit an order. Users are only required to enter their personal info to submit order.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Rollover Navigation Menu Button&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;By checking this box, the menu rollover feature will be enabled. To replace the rollover image (or the static menu image) you can simply upload new button images to the images folder while maintaining the existing file names.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Credit Card Expiration Year Range&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This value will be used for the credit year range in drop down list for the offline form. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable IPTC Metadata Feature&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox when you want system to import IPTC metadata to the database when image is being imported to the database. If your media doesn&#039;t have IPTC metadata embed then you should not tick this checkbox, as this will reduce the loading time.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable IPTC Metadata Mapping&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox, system will auto map the IPTC metadata to the media property page when image being imported to the system. The IPTC metadata mapping is under the IPTC Configuration section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Admin Panel Query Row Limit&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Each time the system fetches data from the MySQL database, it will use this number to ask the DB to return the maximum number of rows. This number will be used throughout the admin control panel. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove Pending Orders After&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When users checkout an order, the system will create pending orders in the database. These orders will remain in the database until users complete the checkout or the admin manually deletes them. Use this field to tell the system to delete these orders automatically based on the #of days. This would free up some server space.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove Private Gallery Temporary Session After&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When users are using the Send to Friend feature in the private gallery, the system will create a temporary session and store it in the database. These sessions will remain in the database until you delete them. Use this field to tell the system to delete these session based on the # of days specified. When the session is deleted from the database, users will no longer be able to access to the gallery using that session ID. Enter 0 when you don&#039;t want system to delete them from the database.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Navigation Menu&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;There are three options for you to choose from.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Gallery Navigation Menu Button with Rollover Option Enabled&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the system displays the navigation button in the gallery with Rollover option enabled. When you mouse over the navigation menu button it will change to the rollover button state. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Gallery Navigation Menu Button with Rollover Option Disabled&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the system will only display the navigation buttons in the gallery with no Rollover option enabled. When you mouse over the navigation button, it won&#039;t change to the rollover state. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Gallery Navigation Menu Dropdown&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the system will use a dropdown menu for the navigation menu function. You will be able to view the sub-menu items when you mouse over a particular menu button. This option is ideal for a site with many pages. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Show Private Categories in the Public Gallery&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;By default, private galleries (protected categories) do not display in the Public Gallery, so users need to login the private gallery section in order to view their private galleries. When this option is checked, the system will list the Private Category name in the public gallery section and allow users to click on it to login.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Show Category with no Media&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is checked, the system will list the category in the gallery regardless of whether it contains media or not.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Maximum Number of Logs per User&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;When the system stores user log data in the database, it will use this number to limit the number of rows to be logged for each user. Use this option to avoid filling all of the available MySQL database space. Enter 0 if you want the system to store the logs regardless of the amount of server space&lt;br /&gt;used.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save your new configuration settings.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(157,'0','language','admin','&lt;p&gt;This feature allows you to offer additional languages for your customers to select from. The primary system language is &lt;strong&gt;English &lt;/strong&gt;and therefore you are not able to delete this language from the system.&amp;nbsp;On this page, the Stockbox Admin can:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; to edit an existing language.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; to delete an existing language.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;You can specify the default language that the system will display when users enter your site.&amp;nbsp;The default language will be marked as &lt;strong&gt;Yes&lt;/strong&gt; in the &lt;strong&gt;User Default Language&lt;/strong&gt; column. To set another language as the default language, simply click on the &lt;strong&gt;No&lt;/strong&gt; link for the desired language and the status will change to &lt;strong&gt;Yes&lt;/strong&gt;..&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Please Note:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;If you delete a language, you will have to manually delete the following folders:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;images/admin/&amp;lt;your-language-name&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and its contents&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;language/&amp;lt;your-language-name&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and its contents&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;scripts/&amp;lt;your-language-name&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and its contents&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;template/&amp;lt;your-language-name&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and its contents&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/&amp;lt;your-language-name&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; and its contents&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Before adding a new language, you will need to make sure that the following directories are writable (permissions set to 777):&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;images&lt;/strong&gt; directory&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;language&lt;/strong&gt; directory&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;scripts&lt;/strong&gt; directory&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;template&lt;/strong&gt; directory&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;tpl&lt;/strong&gt; directory&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;CREATE A NEW LANGUAGE&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language Name:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter the new language name. Please use the Latin characters.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language Description:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter the description for new language. This description is usually your language name and will be displayed in the Language select box in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language Icon:&lt;/strong&gt; Upload an icon for the new language. This icon will be displayed if your &lt;strong&gt;Language Display Style&lt;/strong&gt; (selected it in the Language Configuration) is set to &lt;strong&gt;Icon&lt;/strong&gt;. This icon will be uploaded by the system to the &lt;strong&gt;images&lt;/strong&gt; directory.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;ADD&lt;/strong&gt; button to create a new language.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(158,'102','language','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to&amp;nbsp;edit the language properties.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language Icon:&lt;/strong&gt; Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/upload.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; icon to upload&amp;nbsp;a new icon for this language.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language Description:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter a new description for this language.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/back.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;Back link&amp;nbsp;to return to the LANGUAGE MANAGER page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(159,'104','language','admin','&lt;p&gt;You can delete your language here.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; to delete the selected language.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; to cancel this operation and return to the LANGUAGE MANAGER page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(160,'106','language','admin','&lt;p&gt;You&amp;nbsp;can change the&amp;nbsp;language icon here.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Change Icon:&lt;/strong&gt; Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse...&lt;/strong&gt; to choose the desired icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; icon to upload new language icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the operation and&amp;nbsp;return to the EDIT LANGUAGE page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(161,'beanstream','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your Bean Stream Gateway account details. With this payment gateway, the payments are processed directly on your site. You will need to install a secure certificate (SSL) on your site.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Beanstream Secure URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the secure URL that points to the beanstream.php file that comes with the Stockbox zip package. You should install a SSL Certificate on your site before using this feature..&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Beanstream Post URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;There is no need to change this field.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Beanstream Merchant Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your beanstream merchant Id to this field. You should have merchant id from provider once registered.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the configuration.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Beanstream, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.beanstream.com&quot;&gt;www.beanstream.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(162,'162','media_manager','admin','&lt;table border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;90%&quot; cellpadding=&quot;0&quot; cellspacing=&quot;1&quot; align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;\r\n	&lt;tr&gt;\r\n		&lt;td align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;Using this feature you can upload multiple display files, thumbnails. sample (comp) download files or high-res download files to your server in one operation. In order for this feature to function, your web browser must support flash files. All modern browsers should support flash files. If you don&amp;#039;t see the flash file load when you click on the Upload Icon, you will need to install the flash add-on for your web browser.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Once the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Flash Upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; file is loaded in your browser, you will see two &quot;windows&quot;. One labeled &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Local&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and another with labeled &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Server&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Local&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This window will display the files on your local computer when you select them in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; window.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Server&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This window will display the folders and files on your server where the Stockbox software is installed. You should only upload high-res files to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Download Folder - Hi-res files&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hi-res Auto Resize&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder and your Display Images to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Folder- Low-res Files&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder.&amp;nbsp; &lt;strong&gt;Please note&lt;/strong&gt; that the &quot;Hi-res Auto Resize&quot; option in the server pane will not display if the ImageMagick&amp;copy; path set in the Media Configuration is not correct.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Hi-res Auto Resize&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When selecting the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hi-res Auto Resize&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder you must upload hi-res images to this folder only. This feature will automatically generate the download files, the display files and the thumbnail files from the uploaded hi-res images. This option is only available when you have ImageMagick&amp;copy; Installed on your server and you have input the correct path in the Media Configuration. Also, the system only supports JPG or JPEG file formats when using this feature. Once you have completed the upload of the hi-res files to this folder, you must use the &lt;span style=&quot;color: #000000;&quot;&gt;Import Hi-res&lt;/span&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/import_hi_res.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import hi-res&quot; /&gt; function to import these files into the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n    &lt;strong&gt;Release Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\nYou can upload release files for your media to this folder. System will display this file in the media property page for you to assign it to particular media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click&amp;nbsp;on the Browse button to browse to your local files. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to select them.&amp;nbsp;To select more than one file, hold the &lt;strong&gt;Ctrl Key&lt;/strong&gt; while selecting the additional files.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Upload&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click the Upload button to start&amp;nbsp;the upload of your local files to the server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Upload Options:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;We recommend that run a batch process on your hi-res images to &lt;strong&gt;re-size them for display prior to uploading &lt;/strong&gt;them to the gallery folder. You need to upload your display sized images to the gallery folder and the system will use these to generate the thumbnails. If you want to offer instant downloads, then you will need to upload the high resolution files to the download folder.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder. If this option is selected, the system will automatically import (Auto Detect) the uploaded display images into the gallery database once the action is completed. Depending on the setting in the Media Configuration the system will also generate the thumbnail images for the media. The file names will be prefixed with the prefix assigned (gallery_ by default) in the &lt;strong&gt;Configuration &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; width=&quot;7&quot; height=&quot;7&quot; /&gt; Media&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Sample Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;Gallery&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; folder. You should select this option when you&amp;#039;re uploading sample files for the &quot;Sample Download&quot; feature. The system will prefix the uploaded files with the &quot;sample_&quot; prefix. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Thumbnail Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder. You should select this option when you&amp;#039;re uploading thumbnails for your display images. The file names will be prefixed with the prefix assigned (gallery_ by default) in the &lt;strong&gt;Configuration &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; Media&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type Prefix:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Once the download files have been uploaded you will need to assign the download files to display files using the Global Enable Download Links function. There is more information on this in the &lt;strong&gt;Media Manager&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Instant Download Links&lt;/strong&gt; section of the main help menu.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;Download&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; folder. If you are uploading Rights Managed download files then you will need to select this option in the dropdown menu. The system will prefix the uploaded files with the &quot;LICENSED_&quot; prefix. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Other Product Types&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;If you are uploading images for Royalty Free downloads then you should select the applicable Product Type in the dropdown menu and the system will prefix the uploaded files with the &quot;Product Name&quot; (not the Label) as specified in the Product Manager section of the Admin Control Panel.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Option:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Overwrite&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the system will overwrite existing files in the selected category (directory) if they have the same filename as those being uploaded. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Cancel&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;You are able to cancel the upload process at anytime after it has started by clicking on the Cancel button. The browser will continue to finish the current file upload before it stops.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: This is not a FTP Client Application so it still relies on your server&amp;#039;s PHP configuration. The maximum size for each file uploaded is restricted by the &lt;strong&gt;upload_max_filesize&lt;/strong&gt;, &lt;strong&gt;post_max_size&lt;/strong&gt;, &lt;strong&gt;max_execution_time&lt;/strong&gt; and&amp;nbsp; &lt;strong&gt;memory_limit &lt;/strong&gt;configuration settings in your php.ini file. The PHP default for the &lt;strong&gt;upload_max_filesize&lt;/strong&gt; variable is 2 MB. If you have a dedicated server you can increase this limit by editing the &lt;strong&gt;php.ini&lt;/strong&gt; file on your server. If you don&amp;#039;t have a dedicated server, you will need to ask your hosting provider to do it for you. The server may timeout during the uploading of media to the server if your internet connection speed is too slow.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;\r\n	&lt;/tr&gt;\r\n	\r\n	&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;\r\n&lt;/table&gt;',NULL,NULL),(163,'134','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this function&amp;nbsp;to un-approve selected media that were uploaded by photographers.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;You can&amp;nbsp;remove selected media from the un-approve list&amp;nbsp;by clicking on&amp;nbsp;the respective&amp;nbsp;checkbox.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To cancel the un-approve&amp;nbsp;action, click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To&amp;nbsp;confirm the&amp;nbsp;un-approve action for the&amp;nbsp;selected media, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(164,'170','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;Using this feature, you are able to create a new order for your customers without going through the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To create a new order, you&amp;nbsp;must first select the&amp;nbsp;media in the Media Manager by clicking on the checkbox&amp;nbsp;for the&amp;nbsp;particular media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Tick the checkbox&amp;nbsp;for the particular Product Type or Rights-Managed Type for the target media and click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to continue.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(165,'171','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;Select the customer&#039;s username in the Username Drop Down List or click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to add a new customer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Once you select a username&amp;nbsp;from the drop down list, the system will automatically populate the input fields with information contained in the&amp;nbsp;customer&#039;s purchase account profile.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the customer&#039;s shipping information.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to continue.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(166,'175','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;Select the Order Status in the Order Status Drop Down list. There are two types available.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;1. &lt;strong&gt;Complete&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the&amp;nbsp;system will create a new order&amp;nbsp;with &lt;strong&gt;Completed&lt;/strong&gt; status. If the order is an instant download type, then the&amp;nbsp;user will be able to download&amp;nbsp;the order once it has been created.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;2. &lt;strong&gt;Incomplete&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the&amp;nbsp;system will create a new order&amp;nbsp;with &lt;strong&gt;Pending&lt;/strong&gt; status.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Promotion Code&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the Promotion Code and Click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;icon to apply the code. The system will deduct the Promotion Value (if it&#039;s a valid Promotion Code) from the Grand Total.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to create the&amp;nbsp;new order.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(167,'173','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;You can delete mutliple media files at&amp;nbsp;a time using this function. The system will list all of the media that you have previously selected in the Media Manager section.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Also DELETE selected media files from the server&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the system will remove the selected media from the database and also delete them from the physical server disk. You&amp;nbsp;will not be&amp;nbsp;able to restore the selected files to the gallery if&amp;nbsp;this option is selected.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    &lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;strong&gt;Also DELETE original files &amp;amp; Download Files of selected media if available from the server&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        When this option is selected, system will also delete media original files and download files if available from the server.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To remove the selected media from the Delete Action, tick on the checkbox&amp;nbsp;for the particular media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the Delete Action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the Delete Action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(168,'102','ftp','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this function to set the Global&amp;nbsp;FTP Download Server Configuration for all categories. You should use this feature only when you have all download links on the same remote server. You should not use this function when the download files are residing on the same server where the stockbox system is installed.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Host Name:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the host name of the remote FTP server. It can be the IP Address or domain name.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Username:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the username of the remote FTP server.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Password:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the password of the remote FTP server.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Tick the &lt;strong&gt;SSL FTP Connection&lt;/strong&gt; checkbox when your server requires an SSL connection.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Port #:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the port of remote FTP server. Most servers are using port 21 or 991 for an SSL connection.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remote Home Directory:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click on the GET button to connect to the remote server and browse to the directory where the download files reside, then click SELECT.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Auto Assign to New Category:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;If this checkbox is checked, the system will auto update the Remote FTP server info to a new category when it&#039;s added to the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will not check whether the high-res files exist on the remote ftp server. The download files must be named using the same naming convention as the download files would be if you were using the Global Enable Download Links feature.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(169,'226','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this configuration to disable the automatic pricing function set in the &lt;strong&gt;Product Manager&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Product Types &lt;/strong&gt;section or enable the automatic pricing function for particular Product Type to selected categories.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;System Path&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This is the path of the target category.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The display name is a display of the selected category.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Automatic Pricing on this Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To disable the &quot;Auto Price&quot; on the target category tick this box.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Including Sub-categories&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To apply the same setting to the subcategories of the target category, tick this box. The settings will be applied once the action is completed by clicking on the Apply icon.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick the Product Types that you want to &quot;Auto Price&quot; in the target category. The system will auto price the configured base price and base credit for all future media that are uploaded to the target category. &lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to apply the action, or click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(170,'137','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note:&lt;/strong&gt; This feature applies a physical watermark on the display images. Images can&#039;t be recovered to their original un-watermarked state after they have been watermarked. So please make sure that you backup all display images locally before doing so.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Cancel the watermark action click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the Apply &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to add watermarks to images in the category that have not had a watermark previously applied.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the Overwrite &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/file_apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;overwrite&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to use the watermark overwrite option that will apply a watermark to ALL images. If an image was previously watermarked it will be re-watermarked. This re-application will darken (make it less transparent) the appearance of the watermark.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The type of watermark that will be applied will be determined by the setting in the Media Configuration&amp;nbsp;section. After this action completes the status for the target category will change from &lt;strong&gt;Not Generated&lt;/strong&gt; to &lt;strong&gt;Generated&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Before using this feature, you must ensure that&lt;strong&gt; all image folders AND files have permissions of 777 (r/w/e).&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(171,'142','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;The system will resize the longest dimension of the images to the size entered in the Media Configuration. The system will maintain the aspect ratio of the images during the resize process. Only images which have a larger size compared to the resize value will be resized.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;This feature is not recommended for a large category of images or for very large files, as it can cause the server to timeout before the operation completes. If a blank page is displayed, please continue by refreshing the screen until the message &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Action Performed Successfully&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is shown. This indicates that the resize image process is complete.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm and complete the action, or click on the Cancel &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system will resize the images in the category based on the setting in the &lt;strong&gt;Media Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; section.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE:&lt;/strong&gt; Before using this feature, you must ensure that&lt;strong&gt; all image folders AND files have permissions of 777 (r/w/e). &lt;/strong&gt;Images can&#039;t be recovered to their original size after resizing. So please make sure that you backup all images locally before doing so.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(172,'163','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page will show you all SEND TO FRIEND logs.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/searchable_icon.gif&quot; alt=&quot;drill down&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to see more details&amp;nbsp;for the&amp;nbsp;particular SEND TO FRIEND log.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to delete a particular SEND TO FRIEND log.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;empty&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to delete all SEND TO FRIEND logs.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(173,'164','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page&amp;nbsp;displays the&amp;nbsp;details of the selected SEND TO FRIEND log.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(174,'168','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;To cancel the&amp;nbsp;delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To confirm the delete action, click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(175,'204','order_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page allows you to add notes to the selected order. The notes will be stored in the database until the selected order is deleted from the database.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter any notes to the &lt;strong&gt;Notes&lt;/strong&gt; field and click the submit button. The system will display the notes under &lt;strong&gt;Previous Notes&lt;/strong&gt; section.&amp;nbsp;The&amp;nbsp;username of the person who added it and the date&amp;nbsp;will also be logged. When a customer downloads an instant download type order from their My Account area, the details of the download will also be stored in the &lt;strong&gt;Previous Notes&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(176,'200','order_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page displays all customer&#039;s Pending, Cancelled, and Processing orders that are currently residing in the database. A Cancelled order is a previously Completed order that was cancelled by the admin. A Processing order is an order submitted using the &quot;Offline Form&quot; and has not yet been processed by the admin.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To search for and display the details of a particular order, enter the &lt;strong&gt;Order Id&lt;/strong&gt; into the &lt;strong&gt;Quick View Order Detail&lt;/strong&gt; input field and click the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;view&lt;/strong&gt; the &lt;strong&gt;Order Details&lt;/strong&gt;, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Order Id&lt;/strong&gt; link for the particular order.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To change the status of an order from &lt;strong&gt;Pending&lt;/strong&gt; to &lt;strong&gt;Completed&lt;/strong&gt; click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/file_apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;complete&quot; /&gt; icon. &lt;br /&gt;When an order is completed, the download link will be available to customers in their My Account area if there is an instant download media in the order. Once the status is changed to Completed the order will be moved to the Completed Orders section.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Delete an order &lt;/strong&gt;click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; /&gt; icon. &lt;br /&gt;You will need to confirm the delete action before the system removes the selected order from the database.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view the &lt;strong&gt;Promotion Code&lt;/strong&gt; details click on the promotion value hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;The hyperlink is only visible if customers have input a promotion code during the checkout process. After clicking on the hyperlink, you will see all promotion codes that were used for the selected order id.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view customer&#039;s &lt;strong&gt;Registration &lt;/strong&gt;information, click on the customer&#039;s username.&lt;br /&gt;The customer&#039;s profile page will display with the customer&#039;s profile information.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Other Functions&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To go back to Order Manager page, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/back.gif&quot; alt=&quot;back&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Back&lt;/strong&gt; link.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To add notes to the selected order, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/note.gif&quot; alt=&quot;notes&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Notes&lt;/strong&gt; link.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To change the order&#039;s status&amp;nbsp;to&amp;nbsp;completed, click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/file_apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;complete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Complete&lt;/strong&gt; link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete the selected order from the database, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; link.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To send an invoice to the customer&#039;s email address, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/mail.gif&quot; alt=&quot;mail&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Send Invoice&lt;/strong&gt; link.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To print the order details, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/print.gif&quot; alt=&quot;print&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Printable&lt;/strong&gt; link.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To email the order details to others, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/mail.gif&quot; alt=&quot;mail&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;E-Mail&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;All available data can be sorted by the displayed hyperlinked column titles. You can reverse the displayed sort order by clicking on the same link again.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To navigate to the &lt;strong&gt;Next&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;Previous&lt;/strong&gt; order pages, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/next_arrow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; and &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/back_arrow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icons respectively.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(177,'121','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to export customer registration data.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Customer Export Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Use this section to&amp;nbsp;instruct the system which Registration Fields that you want to collect. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Database Field Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;These fields are from the Customer Registration section. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Export Field Label&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the label that you want for the selected field or leave it blank. When it&#039;s blank, the&amp;nbsp;system will use the field name of the selected field &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;ADD&lt;/strong&gt; to add the new custom field to the export configuration. When a new field name is added, it will be displayed in the lower section. You can duplicate any field as desired. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Customer Export Generator&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Start Date&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the Start Date for the export. The Start Date format is in dd/mm/yyyy.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;End Date&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;Enter the End Date for the export. The End Date format is in dd/mm/yyyy.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Customer Status&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the customer&#039;s status in the drop down list. It can be either&amp;nbsp;Active, Pending or All Customers.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Customer Export Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the name that you want system to use for&amp;nbsp;the export name.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Export&lt;/strong&gt; button to export the customer registration data. The export file is in .csv (commas separated value) format. You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel&lt;span style=&quot;font-family: Times New Roman;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt; (or any other spreadsheet application).&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(178,'128','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to send an email to the selected customer. You&amp;nbsp;are able to send the email to your customer using either HTML or Plain Text Format. By Default the system will use Plain Text Format. If you want to send it in HTML format, then you&amp;nbsp;will need to&amp;nbsp;switch it to HTML format&amp;nbsp;using the drop down selector above the&amp;nbsp;compose email form.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Subject&lt;/strong&gt; for outgoing email.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Message&lt;/strong&gt; content for the outgoing message.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SEND&lt;/strong&gt; button&amp;nbsp;to send the email to the selected customer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(179,'108','dynamic_form','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page provides&amp;nbsp;a preview&amp;nbsp;of your current registration form.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(180,'119','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;When users are requesting the reset of a lost password in the gallery, the system will store the request in the database. The temporary password will be deleted once users have activated their new password by clicking on the link in the &quot;Lost Password&quot; email that the system sends out.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The displayed sort order of the Request Password or related information can be changed by clicking on the column header title links.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(181,'130','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;The &lt;strong&gt;Temporary Session&lt;/strong&gt; is a session that stockbox generates when a user sends their Stockbox to a friend from the Private Gallery. You can delete any session on this page, but once it&#039;s been deleted the user&#039;s friend will not be able to access the private gallery. Therefore, you should only delete sessions that&amp;nbsp; have been in the database for an extended period of time. Enter 0 when you don&#039;t want system to delete them from the database.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;You can configure the system to delete any session that is no longer valid, using the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Remove Private Gallery Temporary Session After&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option in the General Configuration.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(182,'126','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this section to configure how the system&amp;nbsp;processes new customer&amp;nbsp;registrations.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Agreement Checkbox on Customer Registration Form&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled the system will require users to check the Agreement checkbox before being able to submit the registration data to your server. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable New Account Email Validation&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled the system will send out a &quot;Validation Email&quot; to the user&amp;#039;s registered email which will allow them to validate their email address. Once they validate their email address, the system will update their account status to &quot;Active&quot;, allowing them to purchase media from the gallery. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Send Welcome Email to New Customer on Approval&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will send out a &quot;Welcome Email&quot; to the user&amp;#039;s registered email address when their account status changes to &quot;Active&quot;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Eable FTP Syndication in My Account Section&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, users are able to configure their remote FTP server and upload their purchased instant download files directly to their server.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Allow Guest Checkout Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\nTick this checkbox when you allow user to purchase as Guest in the gallery. User will not need to register to your site to purchase media.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Online User Log&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will log all visitors that access your gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Minimum Number of Characters for Customer&amp;#039;s Username&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This is the minimum number characters that customer must use for their username. A value of 7 or greater is suggested.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: The system requires the &quot;./config/config.inc.php&quot; file to be writable in order for this function to work. You will need to change the file permission of the &quot;config&quot; directory and its files to 777 before using this function.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(183,'130','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to export the photographers registration data.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer Export Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Use this section to tell the system which Registration Fields&amp;nbsp;you want to collect. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Database Field Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;These fields are from the Photographer Registration section. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Export Field Label&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the label that you want for the selected field or leave it blank. When it&#039;s blank system will use the field name of selected field &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;ADD&lt;/strong&gt; to add the&amp;nbsp;new custom field to the export configuration. When a new field name is added it will&amp;nbsp;display in the lower section. You can duplicate any field as desired. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To remove an &lt;strong&gt;Export Field&lt;/strong&gt;, click on the Delete &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer Export Generator&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Start Date&lt;/strong&gt; by clicking on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/date.gif&quot; alt=&quot;date&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon. Select the Month and Year from the dropdown menus and select a date from the calendar to complete the selection.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;End Date&lt;/strong&gt; by clicking on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/date.gif&quot; alt=&quot;date&quot; /&gt; icon. Select the Month and Year from the dropdown menus and select a date from the calendar to complete the selection.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;strong&gt;Photographers&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt; Status&lt;/strong&gt; (All, Active or Pending).&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Photographers&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt; Export Name&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Export&lt;/strong&gt; button and the system will open a small window that will allow you to Open or Save the Photographer Export. The export file is in .csv (commas separated value) format. You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel&lt;span style=&quot;font-family: Times New Roman;&quot;&gt;&amp;reg;&lt;/span&gt; (or any other spreadsheet application).&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(184,'124','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Photographer Password Requests are temporary passwords that the system auto generates when the Photographer&amp;nbsp;submits a request&amp;nbsp;to recover a lost&amp;nbsp;password. The password will&amp;nbsp;reside in the database until&amp;nbsp;they activate&amp;nbsp;their temporary password, or until you&amp;nbsp;manually delete them.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(185,'106','lightbox','admin','&lt;p&gt;The Send Lightbox Logs allows you to manage the user&amp;#039;s Send Lightbox Emails. On this page you can see where the email was being sent to and other related information.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;\r\nClick on the &lt;strong&gt;View Detail&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/zoom_in.gif&quot; alt=&quot;zoom out&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to view the details of the sent email.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;You can delete a particular Send Lightbox Log by clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon for that log.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Empty&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;trash&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to empty all of the lightboxes that are currently in the database.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(186,'104','lightbox','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this configuration page to manage the lightbox section in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Maximum Number of Media for Each Lightbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the Maximum Number of media that you allow users to add to each lightbox.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Multi-Lightbox Feature&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Require Login to Use Lightbox&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Require Login to Send Lightbox&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; options are automatically enabled. The system will allow users to create as many lightboxes as desired in the gallery, but each lightbox still relies on the Maximum Number of Media for Each Lightbox value set above.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Require Login to Use Lightbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will require users to login before using the Lightbox Manager (Ent. version) or adding media to their active lightbox.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Require Login to Send Lightbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will require users to login before sending their lightbox. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Send Request a Quote Feature&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;When this option is available the &quot;Request a Quote&quot; icon will display on the Lightbox page of the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Allow User Comments in Lightbox &lt;/strong&gt;(Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions) &lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will allow users to add comments to the media in their lightbox . The comments will be stored in the database until the user removes them from their lightbox.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable &quot;&lt;em&gt;Add to Cart&lt;/em&gt;&quot; Button in Lightbox &lt;/strong&gt;(Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions) &lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will allow users to purchase images directly from their lightbox. Users can add as many media to their lightbox as they want and then add them to their shopping cart directly from their lightbox, without first having to visit the media detail page for each image. This feature is designed to streamline the purchase process for images that users have already added to their lightbox.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;User Lightbox Session Life (in days)&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will remove any user lightbox contents from the database based on the value entered. If you don&#039;t want the system to remove the user lightbox contents, then you should enter 0 into the input field. The number of days is calculated from the date that the lightbox was created.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(187,'224','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this function to assign pricing to selected Product Types and to selected categories of media in one operation. You can also use the same function to apply pricing to all Product Types, to all categories of media in one operation.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;All Product Type Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox, to tick all of the current Product Type checkboxes at once. This will apply pricing to ALL Product Types.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Specific Product Type Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick the specific Product Type checkboxes that you want to apply pricing to. This will apply pricing only to the selected Product Types.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;All Categories checkbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox, to tick all of the current category checkboxes at once. Pricing will be applied for all &quot;checked&quot; Product Types to ALL categories in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Specific Category Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick the specific category checkboxes that you want to apply pricing to. Pricing will be applied for all &quot;checked&quot; Product Types only to the selected categories in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Include Sub-Categories Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox if you want the system to auto check or un-check all sub-categories of the selected category when the parent category is checked or un-checked.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove Products/Pricing&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;If you would like to remove a product type from display, you can enter a price of 0.00.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit b&lt;/strong&gt;utton to update the Base Price and Base Credit for the selected Product Types to the selected Categories.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(188,'304','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this function to adjust the existing pricing (or credit cost) for media with the target Product Type assigned, without interfering with other media that don&#039;t have the selected Product Type assigned.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;strong&gt;Price / Credit Adjustment Method&lt;/strong&gt;. There are two methods available.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Addition (+)&lt;/strong&gt;: System will add the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;Adjustment Amount&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; to the media&#039;s current price for the selected Product Type.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Subtraction (-)&lt;/strong&gt;: System will subtract the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Adjustment Amount&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; to the media&#039;s current price for the selected Product Type.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;strong&gt;Adjustment Type&lt;/strong&gt; for adjustment, Price or Credit (Ent. version).&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Adjustment Amount&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;, numeric only (no currency symbol).&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Adjustment&amp;nbsp;Amount Options. There are two options available:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Fixed Amount&lt;/strong&gt;: When the Fixed Amount option is selected, the system will add or subtract the entered value from the Product Type&#039;s current Price or Credit amount. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Percentage&lt;/strong&gt;: When the Percentage option is selected, the system first calculates the new amount based on the value entered in the &quot;Adjustment Amount&quot; field and then Adds or Subtracts it from the current price for the selected Product Type. &lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Tick the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Set to ...&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; checkbox if you want system to reset the Selected Product Type Price to 0 if the new adjusted value is less than 0. This will prevent the possibility of having a negative price.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: System will not update media which are not assigned to the Selected Product Type. The system will record all the past adjustments in the database for future reference.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(189,'220','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this function to give discounts to customers that make bulk purchases.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Minimum Purchase Quantity&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the minimum quantity that the customer needs to purchase before the discount will be applied.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Discounted Price per item&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the discounted item price. This price will apply if the quantity purchased by the customer is equal to or greater than this value.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Expiry Date&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the date that the discount pricing will expire.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Promotion Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Promotion Code.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Auto Apply Discounted Pricing&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;If this option is selected, the system will automatically apply the discounted pricing if the minimum quantity is purchased. The customer does not have to input a promotion code, but you will need to input a code when creating the discounted pricing so that the system can track when it is used. If this option is NOT selected, customers will need to enter the promotion code during the checkout process to have the discounted pricing applied to their purchase.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Status&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;when the discounted product pricing is setup, it will have a &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; status by default. The discounted pricing will not be available until you click on the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link to change the status to &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note:&lt;/strong&gt; You can create multiple discounts for the same Product Type, based on different purchase quantities. The one with the greater discount will be applied to the order.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(190,'302','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Update&amp;nbsp;Product Type Discount Setting,&amp;nbsp;input&amp;nbsp;the&amp;nbsp;new values to the appropriate&amp;nbsp;fields and click&amp;nbsp;on the ADD&amp;nbsp;button. The new values will be applied to all new orders.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Minimum Purchase Quantity&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the minimum quantity that the customer needs to purchase before the discount will be applied.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Discounted Price per item&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the discounted item price. This price will apply if the quantity purchased by the customer is equal to or greater than this value.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Expiry Date&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the date that the discount pricing will expire.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Promotion Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Promotion Code.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Auto Discount&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;If this option is selected, the system will automatically apply the discounted pricing if the minimum quantity is purchased. The customer does not have to input a promotion code, but you will need to input a code when creating the discounted pricing so that the system can track when it is used. If this option is NOT selected, customers will need to enter the promotion code during the checkout process to have the discounted pricing applied to their purchase.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Status&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;when the discounted product pricing is setup, it will have a &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; status by default. The discounted pricing will not be available until you click on the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link to change the status to &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note:&lt;/strong&gt; You can create multiple discounts for the same Product Type, based on different purchase quantities. The one with the greater discount will be applied to the order.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(191,'203','subscription','admin','&lt;p&gt;To update the Subscription Description, input the new description into the Sub Description field and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(192,'100','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to create a new Vitual CD or manage existing ones. Using the Virtual CD feature you can sell group of selected media as a package. You can add as many media to the Virtual CD as desired and assign a download link to it, or set it as a delivery type. The system also provides you with options to set the shipping cost and tax.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Add&lt;/strong&gt; a new Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD Media&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To remove media from a Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/zoom_in.gif&quot; alt=&quot;zoom&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon for the particular Virtual CD.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Empty Virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To empty the contents of a Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon for the particular Virtual CD.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Edit Virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To edit a Virtual &lt;span lang=&quot;en-ca&quot;&gt;CD, &lt;/span&gt;click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon for the particular Virtual CD.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Create Virtual CD Order&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To create a Virtual CD order, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/shopping-cart2.gif&quot; alt=&quot;shopping cart&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon for the particular Virtual CD. Fill in all the relevant info in the next screen and continue to create the new order for your customer.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Delete Virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To delete a Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon for the particular Virtual CD. You will need to confirm the action before the system deletes it.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(193,'113','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to add a&amp;nbsp;new Virtual CD to the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; to choose a Virtual CD thumbnail image from your desktop computer.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Check Thumbnail&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link to make sure the thumbnail name is unique on the server.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the Virtual CD &lt;strong&gt;Label&lt;/strong&gt;. The system will display the label in the gallery for the name of the Virtual CD.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the Virtual CD &lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;. The system will display the description on the Products page in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD Type&lt;/strong&gt;. There are two types available, &lt;strong&gt;Delivery&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;Download&lt;/strong&gt;. When a Virtual CD is a delivery type, the system won&#039;t ask for its media Product Type, but it allows you to set the shipping cost for it. Alternatively, when a Virtual CD is a download type, you must assign a download link to the Virtual CD either as a &quot;Single Download Package&quot; or select the Instant Download Product Type in the list. If the &lt;strong&gt;Product Type&lt;/strong&gt; option is selected, then you must make sure there is a download file in the &quot;download&quot; directory for each media file in the Virtual CD with the Selected Product Type prefix. The hierarchy of the download links must be the same as you configured for the other media in the gallery (you need to use the same naming convention and category structure as when assigning download links using the Global Enable Download Links feature).&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Number of Media&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;. The system only allows users to purchase a Virtual CD when you have added the number of media that matches this entered value.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the Virtual CD &lt;strong&gt;Price&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Shipping Cost&lt;/strong&gt;: this option is only available when the Virtual CD is a Delivery Type. You can choose either the Current Shipping Method, Fixed Price or No Charge.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;strong&gt;Tax&lt;/strong&gt; Method. You can either choose, Disable Tax, Fixed Tax or Current Tax Configuration method.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; to add the new Virtual CD. If all data is valid, the system will create the new Virtual CD in the database and it will be shown in the Virtual CD Manager which allows you to update it later if needed. The status of the new Virtual CD will be &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Public&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;, but you will not be able to sell it until its number of media are filled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(194,'112','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Empty the selected Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Cancel the Empty action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(195,'105','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to edit the selected Virtual CD&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To replace the Virtual CD thumbnail, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Replace Thumbnail&lt;/strong&gt; link.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Fill in the new values to the appropriate fields and click on the &lt;strong&gt;EDIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. The system will use the&amp;nbsp;new values&amp;nbsp;for new orders.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(196,'124','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;Select the customer&#039;s username in the Username drop down List.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on&amp;nbsp;the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon to add&amp;nbsp;a new customer (if needed).&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Once you select the username in the drop down list, the system will automatically populate the appropriate fields with the customer&#039;s registration details.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the customer&#039;s shipping information.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Select the New Order Status in Order Status drop down list. The system will create the new order with the status that you select in this drop down field.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to continue.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(197,'300','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this function to configure the Gallery Product Types.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type Listing Style&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Listing Style: the system will display the available Product Types in a list. With this method, customers are able to choose multiple Product Types for a particular media at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;Drop Down Style: the system will display the available Product Types in a drop down list. With this method customers are only able to choose one Product Type for a particular media at a time.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Product Options&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will allow users to purchase Product Options (e.g. Photo Frames) for a particular media when its Product Type has an associated Product Option.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Product Subscriptions&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will allow users to purchase subscription products and use the purchased subscriptions to pay for their orders / downloads. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Product Package&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will allow users to purchase Product Packages and use them to pay for their choice of media based on the Product Package configuration.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will allow users to purchase Virtual CDs. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD Display Number&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the number of Virtual CDs to be listed in the Virtual CD column in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD Display Style&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the display style for the Virtual CD listing&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Option Purchase Calculation Method&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  This option is only applied to the Product Options Products\r\n	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n    	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Sum of All Items Prices&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n   	    System will sum all selected items prices to get the purchased price&lt;/li&gt;\r\n    	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Last Item Price&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    	  System will use the price of the last item that user selects for the purchase price\r\n&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  	  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n    &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(198,'109','right_managed','admin','&lt;p&gt;Using this feature, you can import an existing license to the Stockbox system. Before importing license data to the system, you must ensure that your data is a valid MySQL query (.sql file format) and you should also backup your current database data before proceeding. The import file must only contain three tables, &lt;strong&gt;vss_license_data, vss_license_levels, and vss_license_price. &lt;/strong&gt;The system will empty data from the existing license tables and replace it with the new data values.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To import the license data, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to browse to your local .sql file and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. The system will empty the above tables from the database and import the new data from the file selected.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(199,'107','right_managed','admin','&lt;p&gt;With this feature you can adjust the current Base Price or Price Ratio of existing License Items. The system will add or subtract the adjustment amount to the existing configured Base Price or Price Ratio according to the options below. \r\n&lt;/p&gt;\r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Adjustment&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Method&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n    	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Base Price&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	    System will update adjustment amount to all Details Of Use Items Base Price when this option is selected.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Price Ratio&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	  System will update adjusment amount \r\n        	to all Option Item Price Ratio when this option is selected.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n    &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Adjustment Calculation Method&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n	  &lt;ul&gt;\r\n	    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Addition&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	      System will add the Adjustment Amount to the selected Adjusment Method option amount.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Subtraction&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	      System will substract the Adjustment Amount from the selected Adjustment Method Option amount.\r\n	    &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	    &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Adjustment Amount&lt;/strong&gt; \r\n   	  &lt;ul&gt;\r\n       	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Fixed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	System will update current amount with fixed input value&lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Percent&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	  System will update current amount with  percentage input amount of the current value  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n   	  &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(200,'104','promotion','admin','&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Promotion Code&lt;/strong&gt;: To enable promotion code for the gallery tick this checkbox.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Multiple Promotion Codes on the same Purchase&lt;/strong&gt;: To allow users to use more than promotion code on the same order tick this checkbox.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(201,'101','search','admin','&lt;p&gt;The system will append any word, or character that you input in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Appended Keyword&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; field to user&#039;s input keyword when they are performing a search in the gallery. You can add as many appended keyword as you want using the semicolon &quot;;&quot; to separate them. Below is example of how the system will work with appended keywords.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;e.g. Appended Keywords: &quot;&lt;strong&gt;s;ed&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;The user enters the keyword &quot;&lt;strong&gt;flower&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; in the gallery search feature and the system will search for results based on the three words below.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&quot;&lt;strong&gt;flower&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;, &quot;&lt;strong&gt;flowers&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;strong&gt;flowered&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;Using this example users are able to obtain results for plurals or past tense of the word when they enter the singular, present tense of the word.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(202,'102','search','admin','&lt;p&gt;The system will search for additional results using the keyword synonyms for keyword input by the user. Below is an example of how the system will work for the keyword synonyms.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;e.g.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Archetype&lt;/strong&gt;: flower&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Synonyms&lt;/strong&gt;: rose;orchid&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;The user enters the keyword &quot;flower&quot; in the gallery search feature and the system will search for results based on the three words below.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&quot;&lt;strong&gt;flower&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;, &quot;&lt;strong&gt;rose&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;strong&gt;orchid&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note:&lt;/strong&gt; the system will not search for &quot;&lt;strong&gt;flower&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; when users input the keyword &quot;&lt;strong&gt;rose&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;. If you want the system to return results for &quot;&lt;strong&gt;flower&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; when users input the keyword &quot;rose&quot;, then you will need to create the synonym &quot;&lt;strong&gt;flower&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; for the keyword &quot;&lt;strong&gt;rose&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(203,'103','search','admin','&lt;p&gt;Predefined keywords, are keywords that you want to have listed in the gallery so that users can click on each keyword to obtain a particular group of images which contain the selected keyword. You can add as many predefined keyword as desired by separating them with the semicolon &quot;;&quot;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(204,'100','search','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to configure the search function in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Advanced Search Configurations:&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Category Drop Down Field&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the category drop down list on the Advanced Search page for users to select when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Media Properties Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Media Properties checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Metadata Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Metadata checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Royalty-Free Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Royalty Free checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Rights Managed Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Rights Managed checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Model Release Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Model Release checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Property Release Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Property Release checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Orientation Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Vertical, Horizontal, Square and Panorama checkboxes on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Black &amp;amp; White Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Black &amp;amp; White checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Media Type Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Media Type checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable &quot;Use Partial Search&quot; Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the &quot;Use Partial Search&quot; checkbox on the Advanced Search page when this option is enabled. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Category Properties Searchable&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will also search for results based on the category properties (such as Name and Description) when this option is enabled. To obtain more accurate results it is recommended that this option be &lt;strong&gt;disabled&lt;/strong&gt;.&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Quick Search Configurations:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Quick Search Method&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;There are two options available.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;OR&lt;/strong&gt;: when this option is selected, the system will return results when the searchable contents contain at least one of the user&#039;s input keywords. This method returns a broader (larger) set of results.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;AND&lt;/strong&gt;: when this option is selected, the system will return results when the searchable contents contain all of the user&#039;s input keywords. This method returns a narrower (smaller) set of results.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Partial Searching for Quick Search&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will return any media that has searchable contents containing the input keyword. This means that if the entered keyword makes up part of a keyword contained in the media&#039;s searchable contents, the media will be returned in the search results. e.g. if the user inputs the keyword &quot;ant&quot; into the search input field, the search function will return results for &quot;ant&quot;, &quot;anteater&quot;, &quot;anthill&quot; etc., but it will also return results such as &quot;plant&quot;, &quot;elephant:, etc. This feature can be a very useful tool, but it can also provide many extraneous results.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Royalty-Free Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Royalty-Free (RF) checkbox on the quick search form when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Rights Managed Checkbox&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Rights-Managed (RM) checkbox on the quick search form when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Media Type Checkbox for Quick Search&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will display the Media Type checkbox on the quick search form when this option is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Searchable Fields Configuration:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;By default all media properties fields are searchable after you install the Stockbox system. However, you can specify which fields you want to be searchable. Each time you make changes to this section, the system will ask you to rebuild the searchable contents. You must confirm the action in order for the system to update the searchable contents with new searchable data configuration. &lt;strong&gt;Note:&lt;/strong&gt; these media properties fields are different (separate) from the IPTC Metadata. You can configure the searchable IPTC fields in the &lt;strong&gt;Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; width=&quot;7&quot; height=&quot;7&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;IPTC &lt;/strong&gt;section.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Reference ID&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for the Media Reference ID. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media System Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for the media system name (file name). &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Display Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for the media display name. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media File Path&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for the media file path. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Author Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for the media author name. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Copyright String&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for the media copyright. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Keywords&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for media keywords. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Check this option when you want users to be able to search for media description. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Other Configurations:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Search Logs&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will store the details in the database for the keywords that were searched and how often they were searched.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Minimum Keyword Characters&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To avoid excessive use of server resources, the minimum characters should be set to 3. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Maximum Keyword Characters&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To avoid excessive use of server resources, the maximum characters should be set to no more than 30. The system will exclude the additional characters from the search if they are present.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(205,'chase','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your Chase PaymentTech account details. With this payment gateway, the payments are processed directly on your site. You will need to install a secure certificate (SSL) on your site.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Chase Paymentech Secure URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the secure URL that points to the chase.php file that comes with the Stockbox zip package. You should install a SSL Certificate on your site before using this feature.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Chase Primary Posted URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the primary Posted URL. The production Posted URL should be &lt;strong&gt;https://orbital1.paymentech.net/authorize&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Chase Secondary Posted URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the secondary Posted URL. The system will post data to this URL when it&amp;nbsp;doesn&#039;t receive a reponse from the Primary Posted URL. The production Posted URL for secondary Posted URL should be &lt;strong&gt;https://orbital2.paymentech.net/authorize&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Merchant Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the merchant Id that you get from the Provider&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Terminal Number&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Terminal Number that you get from the Provider&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter payment currency code. 840 is for US currency. You can&amp;nbsp;view a&amp;nbsp;full list of currencies in the Orbital Gateway Interface Specification 4.3.pdf document&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Bin Number&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Bin number that you get from the Provider&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Chase Paymentech, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.chasepaymentech.com&quot;&gt;www.chasepaymentech.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(206,'moneris','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your&amp;nbsp;Moneris account details. With this payment gateway, the payments are processed directly on your site. You will need to install a secure certificate (SSL) on your site.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Moneris Secure URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the secure URL in this field. This URL should point to the moneris.php file. The moneris.php file is located where you installed the software. The URL should be something like the following: https://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-Stockbox/&lt;strong&gt;moneris.php&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Moneris Store Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Store Id that you get from the Provider&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Moneris Token Number&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the&amp;nbsp;Moneris Token Number that you get from the Provider&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Moneris Post URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Post URL that you get from the Provider. The production URL should be &lt;strong&gt;https://www3.moneris.com/mpi/servlet/MpiServlet&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on&amp;nbsp;the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Moneris, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.moneris.com&quot;&gt;www.moneris.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(207,'securehosting','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your&amp;nbsp;Secure Hosting&amp;nbsp;account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Secure Hosting Secure URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the URL that Stockbox would use.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Secure Hosting REF #&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Hosting REF # that you&amp;nbsp;received from&amp;nbsp;Secure Hosting.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Secure Hosting Check Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Secure Hosting Check Code that you&amp;nbsp;received from&amp;nbsp;Secure Hosting.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Secure Hosting Currency&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the currency that you want system to use for new orders.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on&amp;nbsp;the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Login to the Secure Hosting control panel&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;1. Click on the Advanced Settings in the Settings link&lt;br /&gt;2. Check the &quot;Perform callbacks instantly&quot; checkbox&lt;br /&gt;3. Enter the full url path to the activate_securehosting.php file e.g. http://www.domain.com/path-to-Stockbox/&lt;strong&gt;activate_securehosting.php&lt;/strong&gt; to the Callback URL.&lt;br /&gt;4. Click&amp;nbsp;the Submit button&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;There are three default templates for this gateway that come with the Stockbox system. You can edit them on your desktop machine before uploading them to the Secure Hosting Server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;1. Secure-hosting-template.html&lt;br /&gt;Use this template for the order confirmation. In this template we have included the required fields for the new order. You can add more fields as needed. Other fields can be found in the Secure Hosting Control panel.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;2. secure-hosting-htmlgood.html&lt;br /&gt;The Secure Hosting Gateway uses this template when the payment is completed successfully. You only need to change the http://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-Stockbox to your actual URL that links to the Stockbox system&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;3. secure-hosting-htmlbad.html&lt;br /&gt;The Secure Hosting Gateway uses this template when the payment is not completed successfully. You can add any message as preferred to this template to inform your customer that the payment did not complete or provide a link back to your site.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Upload these template to the Secure Hosting Server via the Secure Hosting Control Panel.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Secure Hosting, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.securehosting.com&quot;&gt;www.securehosting.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(208,'eway','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your eWay account details.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Australia Customers&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; All payments are processed directly on your site. You will need to install a secure certificate (SSL) on your site.     	\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Secure URL&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter the Secure URL that links to the eway.php file on your server. e.g. &lt;span style=&quot;text-decoration: underline;&quot;&gt;https://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-Stockbox/&lt;strong&gt;eway.php&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Posted URL&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter the eWay Posted URL, live URL &lt;strong&gt;https://www.eway.com.au/gateway/xmlpayment.asp&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Customer Id&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter the eWay Customer Id that you get from the Gateway Provider &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.   	    &lt;br /&gt; &lt;br /&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\nFor more information on eWay, please visit their website www.eway.com.au&lt;br /&gt; &lt;br /&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;UK &amp;amp; NZ Customer&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; System uses  eWAY Hosted Payment solution for UK &amp;amp; NZ customers. All payments are processed on the eWay secured payment page. You don&#039;t need to have the SSL installed on your server using this option.&lt;br /&gt; \r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt; Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Customer ID&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; Enter the eWay Customer ID that you have from gateway provider &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Username&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; Enter the username of eWay account &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Currency Code&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; Enter the currency to be used for customer purchase (NZD - New Zealand &amp;amp; GBP - United Kingdom) &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Language&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; Enter default language to be used. (EN - English, FR - French, DE - German, ES - Spanish, NL - Dutch) &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;eWay Request URL &amp;amp; eWay Result URL&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; Please leave these fields as it unless gateway provider sends you new URL &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.                   &lt;br /&gt; &lt;br /&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\nFor more information on UK &amp;amp; NZ eWay, please visit their     &lt;br /&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.eway.co.uk&quot;&gt; http://www.eway.co.uk&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.eway.co.nz&quot;&gt;http://www.eway.co.nz &lt;/a&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;',NULL,NULL),(209,'verkkomaksut','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy Post URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Gateway Posted URL. The default URL is &lt;strong&gt;https://ssl.verkkomaksut.fi/payment.svm&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy Merchant Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Gateway Merchant Id that you&amp;nbsp;received from the provider.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy Currency&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Currency that you want the system to use for new orders.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy Type&lt;/strong&gt;: Enter the&amp;nbsp;Payment Type. Please ask the provider for&amp;nbsp;the payment type number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy Auth Code&lt;/strong&gt;: Enter the&amp;nbsp;Auth Code that you&amp;nbsp;received from the provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy Culture&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Select the&amp;nbsp;language that the system will send to the gateway.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit &lt;/strong&gt;button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Suomen Verkkomaksut Oy, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.verkkomaksut.fi&quot;&gt;www.verkkomaksut.fi&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(210,'clickandbuy','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your Click and Buy account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Click and Buy Seller Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the&amp;nbsp;ClickandBuy Seller Id that you get from the Provider.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Click and Buy Premium URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the ClickandBuy Premium URL that you get from the Provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Click and Buy Nation&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the two&amp;nbsp;character&amp;nbsp;Country Code. Please ask your Provider for these codes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Click and Buy User Language&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the&amp;nbsp;language that Stockbox will send to the gateway.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Click and Buy Transaction Password&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Transaction Password that you&amp;nbsp;received from the Provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Click and Buy Stockbox Path&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the full URL Path where you installed the Stockbox system. http://www.domainname.com/path-to-Stockbox&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Transaction password&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;1. Login to your merchant account&lt;br /&gt;2. Click on the Transaction Manager / Manager&lt;br /&gt;3. Click to change the password&amp;nbsp;&quot;Change password for Transaction Manager&quot; &lt;br /&gt;4. Enter the new transaction password here&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: the transaction password is sent to you in the welcome email from clickandbuy.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Link Modification&lt;/strong&gt; - You also need to change activate order link in your Click and Buy control panel&lt;br /&gt;1. Login to your Click and Buy Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;2. Click on Summary / Your Domain &lt;br /&gt;3. Click on the link list&lt;br /&gt;4. Click on the change link&lt;br /&gt;5. Point it to your clickandbuy.php file, e.g.&amp;nbsp;http://www.domainname.com/path-to-Stockbox/clickandbuy.php&lt;br /&gt;6. Click Save&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To setup an account please email: &lt;a href=&quot;mailto:Michael.Doron@clickandbuy.com&quot;&gt;Michael.Doron@clickandbuy.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Click and Buy, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.clickandbuy.com&quot;&gt;www.clickandbuy.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(211,'epdq','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your ePDQ account details. The Cardholder Payment Interface (CPI) method is integrated with the Stockbox system. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Description&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. Ot the checkout page, all payment gateways will be sorted in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;ePDQ Client Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter &lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Client Id that you get from the Provider&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;ePDQ Passphrase&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter Passphrase that you set in the Provider Control panel&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;ePDQ Currency Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Currency Code that you want system to use for new orders. Gateway uses ISO currency 3 digits code. Please ask Provider for other currency codes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;ePDQ Store Display Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your site name&amp;nbsp;or Store Name here.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Login to the ePDQ control panel&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;1. allowed url: http://www.domainame.com/path-to-Stockbox/epdq.php &lt;br /&gt;2. continue option1: yes -optional&lt;br /&gt;3. continue option2: yes -optional&lt;br /&gt;4. continue option3: yes -optional&lt;br /&gt;5. post order results: yes&lt;br /&gt;6. post url: http://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-Stockbox/epdq_result.php&lt;br /&gt;7. post username: Stockbox (your username)&lt;br /&gt;8. post password: Stockbox (your password)&lt;br /&gt;9. post email: test@yourdomain.com (replace with your email address)&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;You will need to replace &quot;www.yourdomain.com&quot; with your actual domain name and &quot;path-to-Stockbox&quot; with your actual path if the software is installed in a sub-folder on your server.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on ePDQ, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.barclaycard.co.uk/business/accepting-payments/epdq-cpi/&quot;&gt;www.barclaycard.co.uk/business/accepting-payments/epdq-cpi/&lt;/a&gt; &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.barclaycard.co.uk/business&quot;&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(212,'moneybookers','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your&amp;nbsp;Money Bookers account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;MoneyBookers Post URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the MoneyBookers Post URL, &lt;strong&gt;https://www.moneybookers.com/app/payment.pl&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Your Email Address&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the email address that you&amp;nbsp;registered with the Provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Your Company Description&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter Your Company Or Site Description.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Default Language&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the default language on the provider website for your customers when they&#039;re redirected to the Provider website.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the currency Code that you want the system to use for new orders.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Completed Confirm Message&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the message that the Provider will display once users complete the payment process.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Secret Word&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the secret word that you&amp;nbsp;set in the Provider&#039;s Control panel.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Moneybookers, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.moneybookers.com&quot;&gt;www.moneybookers.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(213,'google','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your Google Checkout account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Merchant Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Merchant id that you get from the Provider.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Merchant Phrase&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Secret Phrase that you get from the Provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Currency Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the currency code that you want the system to use for new orders.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Test Mode&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Select Yes, if you want the system to use the test mode on new orders, otherwise set it to No.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Set API callback URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;1. Login to&amp;nbsp;Google Checkout&lt;br /&gt;2. Click on the Settings Tab&lt;br /&gt;3. Click the&amp;nbsp;Integration Link&lt;br /&gt;4. Enter the callback URL in the &#039;API Callback URL&#039; box that points to the activate_google.php on your server. e.g. http://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-Stockbox/activate_google.php&lt;br /&gt;5. Select HTML (name/value pairs)&lt;br /&gt;6. Click Save&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Order Processing&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Set Automatically authorize and charge buyer&#039;s credit card&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Google Checkout, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://checkout.google.com&quot;&gt;checkout.google.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(214,'netbanx','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your&amp;nbsp;Netbanx account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Netbanx Post URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Netbanx Post URL without merchant Id. Default URL should be: &lt;strong&gt;https://pay.netbanx.com&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Netbanx Merchant Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the merchant Id that you get from the Provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Netbanx Currency Code&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the currency code that you want system to use for new orders.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Netbanx Secret Key&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Netbanx Secret Key.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Netbanx, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.netbanx.com&quot;&gt;www.netbanx.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(215,'robokassa','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your&amp;nbsp;Robokassa account details. With this gateway the user is re-directed to the gateway&#039;s secure server where the transaction is processed.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Robokassa URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Robokassa URL if it&#039;s different&amp;nbsp;to the current one, &lt;strong&gt;https://merchant.roboxchange.com/Index.aspx&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Robokassa Merchant Login Id&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the&amp;nbsp;merchant Id that you&amp;nbsp;received from the Provider.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Robokassa Pass Phrase 1&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the pass phrase 1 that you setup in the Provider&#039;s control panel.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Robokassa Currency Label&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the&amp;nbsp;currency label. Please ask the Provider for more currency labels.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Robokassa Default Language&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the Robokassa Default language.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on&amp;nbsp;the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Login the roboxchange.com site&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;1. Click on the&amp;nbsp;Administration link&lt;br /&gt;2. Enter the pass #1 and pass#2&lt;br /&gt;3. Enter the URL that links to the activate_robokassa.php file where the Stockbox software is installed&amp;nbsp;on your server to the Results URL field&lt;br /&gt;4. Select the&amp;nbsp;GET method&lt;br /&gt;5. Save changes&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;For more information on Robokassa, please visit their website &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.robokassa.ru&quot;&gt;www.robokassa.ru&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(216,'100','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;The Home, New, Popular (Ent. version), Lightbox, My Account, Products, Shopping Cart, News (Ent. version), Portfolio (Ent. version), Order Info, Contact Us, and About Us pages are installed automatically when the Stockbox system is installed on your server. These pages can&#039;t be removed from the system, but you are able to set them to &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; status. The system will not display a page in the gallery when its status is &quot;Hidden&quot;.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will only display the navigation buttons if they have an Active Status. To hide a particular page, click on the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Yes&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link in the Active status column.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Action&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click on the Edit&lt;strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;admin.php?module=menu&amp;amp;pId=103&amp;amp;lang_name=english&amp;amp;id=1&amp;amp;start=0&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&lt;img title=&quot;Edit Menu&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; alt=&quot;Edit Menu&quot; /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/strong&gt;icon to upload a new image for the target navigation menu button. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;To delete a particular navigation button,&amp;nbsp;click on the Delete&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&amp;nbsp;for the&amp;nbsp;particular menu button. You are only able to delete any new page(s) that you have added to the system. The system won&#039;t allow you to delete the default pages. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Add &lt;/strong&gt;(Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Click on the Add &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: middle;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to add a new static content page to the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(217,'101','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to add new navigation menu button to your gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Button Name&lt;/strong&gt;: Enter a unique page name.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;MouseOut Button Image&lt;/strong&gt;: This button will be used when users move their mouse away from the button.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;MouseOver Button Image&lt;/strong&gt;: This button will be used when users move their mouse over the button.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;URL&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Enter the URL Address where you want users to go to when they click on this button. You can&amp;nbsp;select&amp;nbsp;a gallery page in the drop down list.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT &lt;/strong&gt;button to add the new page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(218,'103','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;On this page you are able to update the navigation buttons and page contents for the pages mentioned in the Edit Contents item below.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To replace the &lt;strong&gt;MouseOut Button Image&lt;/strong&gt;, click on the Browse button and select the new image from your local computer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To replace the &lt;strong&gt;MouseOver Button Image,&lt;/strong&gt; click on the Browse button and select the new image from your local computer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(219,'106','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;To cancel the Delete Action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To confirm the Delete Action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon. The system will also delete the navigation menu buttons from the server when its page is deleted.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(220,'109','language','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to set the Display Style for the&amp;nbsp;Language selection in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Dropdown&lt;/strong&gt;: the system will list all available languages in the drop down list so that users are able to switch from one to another by selecting particular language in the list.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Icon&lt;/strong&gt;: the system will list all languges as icons in the gallery so that users are able to click on&amp;nbsp;a particular&amp;nbsp;icon to switch from one language to another.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(221,'112','administrator','admin','&lt;p&gt;Malicious characters are characters that users might use to try to attack your server. Use this page to&amp;nbsp;instruct the system how to&amp;nbsp;respond&amp;nbsp;if these characters are detected.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;User Input&lt;/strong&gt;: Enter the character that users may enter.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;To Do&lt;/strong&gt;: Select the action in the drop down list. The system will use this action when it detects&amp;nbsp;that a user has&amp;nbsp;input this character.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;System Output&lt;/strong&gt;: This field is only applied when you select the Replace option in the Action List. The system will change the input character to this character when it&amp;#039;s detected.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; to add the new malicious character.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: if you&#039;re using PayPal Standard as payment gateway, you should not enter &#039;, &amp;quot;, &amp;amp;, and space as malicious characters. System won&#039;t able to complete the order with these characters enabled. &lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(222,'200','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Using this feature you can upload multiple display files, thumbnails. sample (comp) download files or high-res download files to your server in one operation. In order for this feature to function, your web browser must support flash files. All modern browsers should support flash files. If you don&amp;#039;t see the flash file load when you click on the Upload Icon, you will need to install the flash add-on for your web browser.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Once the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Flash Upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; file is loaded in your browser, you will see two &quot;windows&quot;. One labeled &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Local&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and another with labeled &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Server&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Local&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This window will display the files on your local computer when you select them in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; window.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Server&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This window will display the folders and files on your server where the Stockbox software is installed. You should only upload high-res files to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Download Folder - Hi-res files&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hi-res Auto Resize&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder and your Display Images to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Folder- Low-res Files&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder.&amp;nbsp; &lt;strong&gt;Please note&lt;/strong&gt; that the &quot;Hi-res Auto Resize&quot; option in the server pane will not display if&amp;nbsp;ImageMagick&amp;copy;&amp;nbsp;is not installed on your server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Hi-res Auto Resize&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When selecting the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hi-res Auto Resize&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder you must upload hi-res images to this folder only. This feature will automatically generate the download files, the display files and the thumbnail files from the uploaded hi-res images. This option is only available when you have ImageMagick&amp;copy; Installed on your server. Also, the system only supports JPG or JPEG file formats when using this feature. Once you have completed the upload of the hi-res files to this folder, you must use the &lt;span style=&quot;color: #000000;&quot;&gt;Import Hi-res&lt;/span&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/import_hi_res.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import hi-res&quot; /&gt; function to import these files into the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;strong&gt;Release Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\nYou can upload release files for your media to this folder. System will   display your release files in the media property page for you to assign it to   target media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\nClick&amp;nbsp;on the Browse button to browse to your local files. Select files that you want to upload and click Open to select them.&amp;nbsp;To select more than one file, hold the &lt;strong&gt;Ctrl Key&lt;/strong&gt; while selecting the additional files.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Upload&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click the Upload button to start&amp;nbsp;the upload of your local files to the server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery Upload Options:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;We recommend that run a batch process on your hi-res images to &lt;strong&gt;re-size them for display prior to uploading &lt;/strong&gt;them to the gallery folder. You need to upload your display sized images to the gallery folder and the system will use these to generate the thumbnails. If you want to offer instant downloads, then you will need to upload the high resolution files to the download folder.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder. If this option is selected, the system will automatically import (Auto Detect) the uploaded display images into the gallery database once the action is completed. Depending on the setting in the Media Configuration the system will also generate the thumbnail images for the media. The file names will be prefixed with the prefix assigned (gallery_ by default) in the &lt;strong&gt;Configuration &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; width=&quot;7&quot; height=&quot;7&quot; /&gt; Media&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Sample Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;Gallery&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; folder. You should select this option when you&amp;#039;re uploading sample files for the &quot;Sample Download&quot; feature. The system will prefix the uploaded files with the &quot;sample_&quot; prefix. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Thumbnail Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Gallery&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder. You should select this option when you&amp;#039;re uploading thumbnails for your display images. The file names will be prefixed with the prefix assigned (gallery_ by default) in the &lt;strong&gt;Configuration &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; Media&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type Prefix:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;Once the download files have been uploaded you will need to assign the download files to display files using the Global Enable Download Links function. There is more information on this in the &lt;strong&gt;Media Manager&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Instant Download Links&lt;/strong&gt; section of the main help menu.&lt;strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option is only available when you upload files to the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;Download&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; folder. If you are uploading Rights Managed download files then you will need to select this option in the dropdown menu. The system will prefix the uploaded files with the &quot;LICENSED_&quot; prefix. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Other Product Types&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;If you are uploading images for Royalty Free downloads then you should select the applicable Product Type in the dropdown menu and the system will prefix the uploaded files with the &quot;Product Name&quot; (not the Label) as specified in the Product Manager section of the Admin Control Panel.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Option:&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Overwrite&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is selected, the system will overwrite existing files in the selected category (directory) if they have the same filename as those being uploaded. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Cancel&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;You are able to cancel the upload process at anytime after it has started by clicking on the Cancel button. The browser will continue to finish the current file upload before it stops.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(223,'201','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;The Global Enable Download Links function is used to assign the download links to&amp;nbsp;an entire target category (directory). When you assign a download link to the target media, the system stores this download link path in the database and this info will not be changed unless you delete a download link from this media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Before using this feature,&lt;/strong&gt; please make sure that all high resolution download files are residing in the download directory under the same directory structure (mirror) as the gallery folder and that you have prefixed the download file names with the respective product type for Royalty Free images and LICENSED_ for Rights-Managed images. When uploading to the download folder with the Batch Upload Media function, the system will apply the filename prefix for you. Also please note that you can only assign one download file to media that have been designated as RM.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Download Links for a Category &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the category from the drop down list. All of this category&amp;#039;s media will be assigned a download link with the selected product by clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Enable Download&lt;/strong&gt; button. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Use the drop down list to select either Price, Credit or Rights-Managed (see below) for this download link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select a product type from the drop down list. You will need to have created at least one Product Type in the Product Manager section to use this function.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Price&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the price of the product type.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Credit&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the credit cost for the product type.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable File Extension&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox and the system will ignore the difference between the display and download the file extensions. e.g. If you have .jpg display images and you have .tiff download files, then you will need to check this box.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Original File&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  Using this option to tell system to use original file for download link of target media\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Including Subcategories&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox and the system will apply the settings and download links to all media that are in subcategories of the target category.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Enable Download&lt;/strong&gt; button to assign the&amp;nbsp;download links to the target category.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(224,'201','order_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;To confirm the Delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To cancel the Delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(225,'106','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Confirm the Delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Cancel the Delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(226,'103','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;To remove a&amp;nbsp;particular media from the Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;remove&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To delete a group of media check the media checkboxes and click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/file_del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;remove&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(227,'111','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Confirm the Delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Cancel the Delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(228,'102','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Add an entire category of media to the selected Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon for of that particular category.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Add multiple category&#039;s media to the selected Virtual CD,&amp;nbsp;tick&amp;nbsp;their respective&amp;nbsp;checkboxes and click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add_all.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add all&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Browse to a particular Category to select its media, click on the category system name.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Add a particular media file to&amp;nbsp;the selected Virtual CD, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absBottom&quot; /&gt; icon&amp;nbsp;for that media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Add multiple media file to the selected Virtual CD, tick&amp;nbsp;their respective&amp;nbsp;checkboxes and click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add_all.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add all&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(229,'104','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Add the selected media or category of media to the Selected Virtual CD, click on &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;APPLY&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To Cancel the Add Action, click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;absMiddle&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(230,'107','search','admin','&lt;p&gt;Input&amp;nbsp;values in the approriate fields and click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button. Use the semicolon (;) to separate&amp;nbsp;Keyword Synonyms.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(231,'208','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;This feature will automatically generate the download files, the display files and the thumbnail files from the high-resolution images that are uploaded to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder.&amp;nbsp;The system only supports JPG or JPEG file formats when using this feature. The system will only generate the download files when the uploaded hi-res image satisfies the minimum dimension that are configured in the &lt;span style=&quot;color: #000000;&quot;&gt;Product Type&lt;/span&gt; section. When there is no instant download configured for a particular product type, the system would recognize it as a print or delivery product and it would not generate the download files for these product types. Also, if you don&#039;t have any product types added when importing the hi-res images to the gallery, the system won&#039;t be able to generate the download files and you will need to manually generate the download files for the display images later if you want to offer them. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Under the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; directory on your server, there may be some folders that are named as &quot;&lt;strong&gt;admin&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; or the photographer&#039;s username. When a new photographer is added to the system, it will automatically create a new folder under the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder with the photographer&#039;s username. You can take advantage of this feature, by creating an FTP account for each photographer and grant the permission on their folder only. If you are not sure how to create FTP accounts, you will need to contact your hosting provider for assistance. In doing so, each photographer would be able to use their FTP account to upload their hi-res images to your server. Using an FTP client to upload hi-res images to the server is more efficient than doing so via your web browser. The admin user or photographer is able to import the hi-res images to the gallery as desired once their hi-res images have been upload to the server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/import_hi_res.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import hi-res&quot; /&gt; icon to import the hi-res Images to the gallery that were uploaded by the admin. To import the hi-res images for a particular photographer, you will need to click on the Import Icon for the particular photographer under the &lt;strong&gt;Photographers&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; /&gt; &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Active Photographers&lt;/strong&gt; section. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Import Icon &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; for a particular file to import it to the database&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; &lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Fill-in all appropriate info to the provided fields. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter 0 to any product type field that is not available for this image. The Dimension that shows in the Product Type section is the dimension that you have configured in the Product Type Instant Download Configuration. The system will auto calculate the other dimension based on the uploaded image&#039;s dimension and its orientation. The N/A in the PPI column indicates a print or delivery product and the system will not generate download files for these product types. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to import this image into the gallery. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To import multiple high-res files at once, tick the respective checkboxes and click on the &quot;Import All&quot; ion.&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; &lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Fill-in all appropriate info to the provided fields. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to import the selected hi-res images into the gallery. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: You must have ImageMagick&amp;copy; installed in order to use this function. Depending on your server configuration, this operation may take some time to process the download, display and thumbnail files. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(232,'209','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;Once you click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button, the system will perform the following actions.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Move the original selected hi-res image to the download directory under its category directory structure.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Generate the display image and thumbnail. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Generate the download images based on the dimension that you have configured for the&amp;nbsp;particular product type. If no instant download dimensions are configured&amp;nbsp;for your product types, then no download files will be generated. You can tell the system not to generate download files for a particular instant download product type by entering&amp;nbsp;0 (zero)&amp;nbsp;for its price.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: You must have ImageMagick&amp;copy; installed in order to use this function.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(233,'212','media_manager','admin','&lt;table border=&quot;0&quot; width=&quot;90%&quot; cellpadding=&quot;0&quot; cellspacing=&quot;1&quot; align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;\r\n	&lt;tr&gt;\r\n		&lt;td align=&quot;left&quot;&gt;&lt;p&gt;Once you click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button, the system will perform the following actions.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Move the original selected hi-res image to the download directory under its category directory structure.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Generate the display image and thumbnail. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Generate the download images based on the dimension that you have configured for the&amp;nbsp;particular product type. If no instant download dimensions are configured&amp;nbsp;for your product types, then no download files will be generated. You can tell the system not to generate download files for a particular instant download product type by entering&amp;nbsp;0 (zero)&amp;nbsp;for its price.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Use IPTC Metadata Mapping Value&lt;br&gt;\r\nCheck this checkbox, system will auto populate media property data with the data of the IPTC Mapped Field for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;When importing multiple hi-res images, you will need to select one of the three Product Type options.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;All Product Types.&lt;br&gt;\r\nSystem will assign all product types that you have in the Product Type Manager for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Only Instant Download Product Types&lt;br&gt;\r\nSystem will only assign Instant Download Product Type for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Only Non Instant Download Product Types.&lt;br&gt;\r\nSystem will only assign Non Instant Download Product Types for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: You must have ImageMagick&amp;copy; installed in order to use this function.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/td&gt;\r\n	&lt;/tr&gt;\r\n	\r\n	&lt;tr&gt;&lt;td&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/td&gt;&lt;/tr&gt;\r\n&lt;/table&gt;',NULL,NULL),(234,'135','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;With the Ent. version you are able to upload selected media download files to a remote FTP server. This feature is an easy and efficient way for to supply your customers with images.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;First you need to select the particular media in the Media Manager using the &lt;span style=&quot;color: #000000;&quot;&gt;Multiple Media File Selection&lt;/span&gt; feature. The system only allows you to upload selected media to the remote FTP server when the selected media &lt;strong&gt;has download links assigned&lt;/strong&gt; to it. So you must assign the download links to the particular media before using this function. Select Product Type by tick its checkbox.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul type=&quot;disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;Tick the Product Type for the particular media to upload.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;Select the customer&#039;s username in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Customer&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; drop down menu. When &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Other&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is selected, you will have to fill-in the Remote FTP details in the following screen prior to the upload.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;CONTINUE&lt;/strong&gt; button to continue the upload process.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(235,'200','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;You need create at least one portfolio&amp;nbsp;in order to add the selected media to&amp;nbsp;the portfolio.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the Portfolio Category Name in the drop down list.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;ADD&lt;/strong&gt; button to add the selected media to the selected portfolio.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to add more media to the selected images list.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;When a new portfolio category or portfolio media are added to the system it will be assigned &lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt; status. You will need to change this to status to &lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt; by clicking on the Hidden link in the Portfolio Manager in order for it to be displayed in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(236,'0','export','admin','&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Image Sitemap Export&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;The Sitemap Export feature (in addition to the Stockbox SEO feature) is designed to improve the ability for the search engines to index your site content. You can find more information on sitemaps via the following sites.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.google.com/support/webmasters/bin/answer.py?hl=en&amp;amp;answer=178636&quot; target=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: #ff8000;&quot;&gt;http://www.google.com/support/webmasters/bin/answer.py?hl=en&amp;amp;answer=178636&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.sitemaps.org&quot; target=&quot;top&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color: #ff8000;&quot;&gt;http://www.sitemaps.org&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will list all current active languages that are in the system in the language drop down list. You can either select one language or have the system export the data for all languages. The language selection only applies to the media properties fields and not the IPTC metadata. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Image Caption&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the desired field for the Image Caption. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Image Geographic Location&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the desired field for the Image Geographic Location. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Image Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the desired field for Image Title. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;EXPORT&lt;/strong&gt; button to export all media based on the mapping field selections.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Property Export&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\nUsing this function to export media property to CSV file. You can configure &lt;br /&gt;\r\n	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n    \r\n    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Database Field Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Select new field in this drop down to add to media property configured field list.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Export Field Label&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Enter label for selected field name in the Database Field Name drop down. System will use this as column label in the CSV file.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;From&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Select Date for &lt;strong&gt;From &lt;/strong&gt;field by click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/date.gif&quot; alt=&quot;date&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;To &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Select Date for &lt;strong&gt;To  &lt;/strong&gt;field by click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/date.gif&quot; alt=&quot;date&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Select Category for media property export&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Include Sub-categories&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	check this checkbox if you want the export function to include the sub categories in the export file.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Language&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Select language if available for the export. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;EXPORT&lt;/strong&gt; button to export media property to CSV file base on your configuration.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Depending on your database size, it may take&amp;nbsp;a little while&amp;nbsp;for the system to export all media in the database. Your web browser will ask you to save the export file to your local computer. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n  &lt;strong&gt;Image Sitemap Export&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  By default the file name is sitemap.xml and you shouldn&amp;#039;t change this name. Once you have it saved to your local computer, you can either submit the sitemap to the search engine(s),&amp;nbsp;or upload the sitemap.xml file to www root directory on your server. The search engines&amp;nbsp;will automatically detect this file when they&amp;nbsp;crawl your site.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(237,'202','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;There are two ways to add the Zoomify&amp;trade; files for a particular media&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Zoomify&amp;trade; Zip Package&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When using this option, you must zip all files under your Zoomify&amp;trade; folder. This zip package must include the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;html&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; file and the folder containing all Zoomify&amp;trade; images. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;- Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to browse to the Zoomify&amp;trade; zip file.&lt;br /&gt;- Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to submit the Zoomify&amp;trade; package. The Stockbox system will rename the html file to &quot;&lt;strong&gt;index.html&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and place this package in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;images/current-time-stamp-folder&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; on the server. If the package is correct you should see the URL in the &lt;strong&gt;Current Zoomify&amp;trade; URL&lt;/strong&gt;. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Zoomify&amp;trade; HTTP URL&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;When using this option, you can enter the URL that links to your public Zoomify&amp;trade; if you have one. The system will use this URL instead of the Zoomify&amp;trade; Package.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(238,'100','banner','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage banner images.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To change the status of a particular image, click on the image&#039;s status link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To edit a particular image, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete a particular image from the banner image list, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To upload a new image to the banner image list, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(239,'101','banner','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to upload your local images to the server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to browse to the image on your local computer.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt; for the uploaded image. System will display the description&amp;nbsp;in the&amp;nbsp;banner slideshow&amp;nbsp;on the gallery home page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter URL address for the uploaded image. System will redirect user to this URL when user clicks on this image in the banner gallery home page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to upload the selected image to the server. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Once images are added to the database, their default status will be &lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;. You will need to change this to status to &lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt; by clicking on the Hidden link in order for it to be displayed in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(240,'103','banner','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to update the &lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt; for the selected image.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(241,'105','banner','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to delete the selected image from the banner image list.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Cancel &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the delete action.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Apply &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the selected image.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(242,'100','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage your Portfolio(s).&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul type=&quot;disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Icon&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will display this icon in the Featured Portfolio section of the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Portfolio Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click on the Edit &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to change the Portfolio Name.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This column displays the username of the photographer. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Featured&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To feature a portfolio in the Featured Portfolio section, click on the NO link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Status&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When a new portfolio category or portfolio media are added to the system it will be assigned &lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt; status. You will need to change this to status to &lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt; by clicking on the Hidden link in order for it to be displayed in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Action&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To Add or Edit Media to a portfolio, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add/Edit Portfolio Media &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To Add Photographer Portfolio Profile, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add Photographer Portfolio Profile &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; title=&quot;Update Photographer Portfolio Profile Content&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add_new_profile.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Update Photographer Portfolio Profile Content&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt;&lt;strong&gt; &lt;/strong&gt;icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To Update Photographer Portfolio Profile Content, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Update Photographer Portfolio Profile Content &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; title=&quot;Update Photographer Portfolio Profile Content&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/user_profile.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Update Photographer Portfolio Profile Content&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt;&lt;strong&gt; &lt;/strong&gt;icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To edit a portfolio, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Edit&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete a portfolio, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(243,'101','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to&amp;nbsp;add a new portfolio or update an existing portfolio.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Enter the name for your Portfolio.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Select the icon for your Portfolio.\r\n\r\n        &lt;ul&gt;\r\n            &lt;li&gt;Do Not Use Icon&lt;br /&gt;The system will not use an icon for this portfolio if this option is selected. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n            &lt;li&gt;Use Random Image&lt;br /&gt;The system will use a random thumbnail image&amp;nbsp;from&amp;nbsp;this portfolio for its icon if this option is selected.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n            &lt;li&gt;Icon Name&lt;br /&gt;Select an icon from the list. You&amp;nbsp;can to upload your own icon to the server using the Upload Icon function. Once it&amp;#039;s uploaded&amp;nbsp;to the server, the system will list the icon&amp;nbsp;in the dropdown&amp;nbsp;menu for you to select.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the Photographer Profile for this Portfolio. The system will display the Photographer&amp;#039;s Name in the Portfolio section of the gallery for users to&amp;nbsp;view. You&amp;nbsp;can update photographer&amp;#039;s profile&amp;nbsp;in the Active Photographer section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;',NULL,NULL),(244,'103','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the delete action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the selected portfolio and its media from the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system will also delete media from the physical server&amp;nbsp;if it&#039;s not&amp;nbsp;assigned to other gallery categories.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(245,'111','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage your Portfolio media. &lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Add Media From Gallery&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  	  Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add Portfolio Media from Gallery&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add_new_media.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon \r\n  	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Add Media From Your Local Computer&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    	Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add Portfolio Media Manually&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;To edit particular portfolio image simply click on its &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;dit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;To delete particular portfolio image simply click on its &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;To upload larger image for particular image simply click on its &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/upload.gif&quot; alt=&quot;upload&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(246,'112','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to add new media to the&amp;nbsp;selected Portfolio from your local computer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to select media from you local computer.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter a description for the media.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to add the new media to the selected Portfolio. The system will automatically generate&amp;nbsp;the thumbnail image&amp;nbsp;when the uploaded media is an image file type. The thumbnail size would be based on the Thumbnail Configuration in the Media Configuration section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(247,'114','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel delete action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm delete action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system will remove the selected media from the database and also delete this media from the physical server when it&#039;s not&amp;nbsp;assigned to any other categories in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(248,'105','iptc','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to map the IPTC metadata to the Stockbox Media Properties fields. The system will automatically import the IPTC metadata to the specified Media Properties fields when new media is imported into the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Latitude &amp;amp; Longitude will be used for the google Map URL. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the desired values in the dropdown&amp;nbsp;menu for the Media Properties fields and click on the SUBMIT button to save the new configuration.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: The system only maps the data once when the image&amp;nbsp;is imported into the gallery. It won&#039;t update new data&amp;nbsp;for existing image properties if&amp;nbsp;you select a&amp;nbsp;new setting&amp;nbsp;in the dropdown menu. To update existing images with the&amp;nbsp;new setting,&amp;nbsp;you must either remove&amp;nbsp;them from the database and then re-import&amp;nbsp;them, or you can click on the Searchable IPTC icons for the respective categories in the Media Manager.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(249,'176','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;You can create as many media types in the system as you wish. By default there are two media types available when you install the system, &lt;strong&gt;Video&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;Image&lt;/strong&gt;. The system allows you to add the file type extension that will be associated with the target Media Type. When the system imports new media into the system, it will automatically set the Media Type for the media based on the file extension of the uploaded media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Add&lt;/strong&gt; a new Media Type, enter the Type Label and associated File Extension(s) and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Edit&lt;/strong&gt; a particular media type, click on the Edit &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; a particular media type, click on the Delete &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p class=&quot;style1&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(250,'178','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;You can update the Media Type label and its associated&amp;nbsp;file extension(s) using this page. The system will update the database with the new label.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(251,'182','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;When the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Media Stats Logs&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option is enabled in the Media Configuration section, the system will log any media in the gallery that user has visited.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To sort a particular media stats column,&amp;nbsp;click on its title hyperlink.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view&amp;nbsp;the details&amp;nbsp;of the particular media, click on its Media ID.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view the&amp;nbsp;&quot;who is&quot; information for a particular IP Address, click on&amp;nbsp;the IP Address. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view more traffic details for a particular media ID, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/searchable_icon.gif&quot; alt=&quot;details&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To have the system ignore a particular IP Address, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/ignore_ip.gif&quot; alt=&quot;ignore ip&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon. Once the IP Address is added to the Ignore List, the system will not log data when the user from this IP is browsing your gallery. You may want to enter the IPs for the search engines so that their activity is not logged by the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete a particular log, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To empty&lt;strong&gt; &lt;/strong&gt;ALL media statistics, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;empty&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(252,'184','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page will display all logs&amp;nbsp;for the&amp;nbsp;selected media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(253,'188','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;When the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Category Stats Logs&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option is enable in the Media Configuration, the system will log any category that user has visited.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To sort particular category stats click on its column title hyperlink &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view&amp;nbsp;the details of the particular category&amp;nbsp;click on its Category ID &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view more traffic details for a particular Category ID, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/zoom_in.gif&quot; alt=&quot;zoom in&quot; /&gt; icon. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To have the system ignore a particular IP Address, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/ignore_ip.gif&quot; alt=&quot;ignore ip&quot; /&gt; icon. Once the IP Address is added to the Ignore List, the system will not log data when the user from this IP is browsing your gallery. You may want to enter the IPs for the search engines so that their activity is not logged by the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete a particular log, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; /&gt; icon. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;empty &lt;/strong&gt;ALL category statistics, click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;empty&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(254,'192','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;To Cancel the empty action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To confirm the empty action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(255,'186','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;To cancel the empty action click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To confirm the empty action click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(256,'194','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to&amp;nbsp;instruct the&amp;nbsp;system to ignore (by-pass) any user that is using a particular IP Address to access&amp;nbsp;your site. The system will not log any activities when it sees the IP Address is in this list.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To add a particular IP Address to the list, simply add the IP Address to the&amp;nbsp;input field&amp;nbsp;and click on the&amp;nbsp;ADD button. You may want to enter the IPs for the search engines so that their activity is not logged by the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Important:&lt;/strong&gt; If you have a high traffic site, the database may use up all of the available server space. To avoid this potential issue, you can set the&lt;strong&gt; Maximum Number of Logs per User&lt;/strong&gt; in the General Configuration. The system will delete old entries for the user when it reaches the maximum number allowed, before inserting the new entries.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To delete a particular IP Address from the list,&amp;nbsp;click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&amp;nbsp;for the IP Address&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To empty ALL IP Addresses,&amp;nbsp;click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;empty&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(257,'104','printing','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manually enter the print fulfillment details for a particular order. The&amp;nbsp;system will store all info along with the automatic print fulfillment logs.&amp;nbsp;Input all appropriate information to the provided&amp;nbsp;fields and click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(258,'306','order_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;Input the&amp;nbsp;appropriate information into the provided&amp;nbsp;fields and clickon the &lt;strong&gt;SEND&lt;/strong&gt; button.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system will zip all of&amp;nbsp;the instant download files to&amp;nbsp;a zip package with the name of the Order ID and send it to the entered email address.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(259,'145','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;By default system will load the customer FTP information that is configured in the customer profile to the remote FTP information fields. However you can change this information to another server as&amp;nbsp;desired and click on the SUBMIT button. The system will upload&amp;nbsp;the hi-res download&amp;nbsp;files to the input FTP server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(260,'102','printing','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is only available for&amp;nbsp;printed product orders. The&amp;nbsp;system will load a default print fulfillment template for the selected order ID. All call tag variables that are configured in the selected print fulfillment XML data will be replaced with the actual order&amp;nbsp;values. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system also displays the previous print fulfillment logs on this page for your references. When&amp;nbsp;a previous log is detected, the system will disable the PROCESS button. You will need to tick the overwrite checkbox before being able to re-process the print fulfillment for the selected order. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To continue to process the selected order, click on the PROCESS button. The system will log this action in the Printing Logs section for your reference.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(261,'0','printing','admin','&lt;p&gt;There are two printing fulfillment service providers that Stockbox system supports. Each provider has its own method to process the order. These two providers require all original images to be uploaded to their server through the&amp;nbsp;provided FTP information. They&amp;nbsp;both require an XML file to be attached along with the images and order info. You will need to update your account info through the XML data by clicking on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit icon&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&amp;nbsp;for the&amp;nbsp;particular provider.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system allows you to process the print order in two ways:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Automatically&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;To have the system&amp;nbsp;automatically process the print fulfillment for new orders, you must enable the&amp;nbsp;&quot;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Automatic Print Fulfillment&amp;nbsp;for New Completed Orders&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option in the General Configuration.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Manually&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;To manually process the print fulfillment for a particular order, go to the Order Manager &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; width=&quot;7&quot; height=&quot;7&quot; /&gt; Completed Orders and click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/printing.gif&quot; alt=&quot;printing&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Regardless of the method used (automatically or manually), the system will&amp;nbsp;process the order in the same way.&amp;nbsp;It will replace all call tag variables that are configured in the providers XML data with the actual order values and then upload all hi-res download files together with the order information to the print providers FTP Server.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To manage the print fulfillment provider&#039;s XML data, please&amp;nbsp;review the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Print Fulfillment&lt;/strong&gt; section of the main help menu (top right of the gallery admin area).&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(262,'133','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Fill-in all appropriate information to the provided text fields and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system will save the input information to the database for later use&amp;nbsp;in the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;FTP Syndication&lt;/strong&gt; feature. To make sure the input data is correct, you should click on the &lt;strong&gt;GET&lt;/strong&gt; button to test the input data and select the remote home directory. The Remote Home Directory will be the&amp;nbsp;directory where the system will upload the&amp;nbsp;ordered instant download&amp;nbsp;files&amp;nbsp;to.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(263,'124','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to send an email or newsletter to a customer group in the HTML format.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Select the outgoing email format in the drop down list above the compose email form, (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions). The system only supports Plain Text format for the standard version.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;return email&lt;/strong&gt; address into the &lt;strong&gt;From&lt;/strong&gt; field. The Return email address is the email address that customers would use if they wanted to reply to your message after receiving it.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Select the customer group in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;To&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; drop down list. (Active Customers, Pending Customers or All Customers)&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Subject&lt;/strong&gt; of the message.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Enter the message body in the &lt;strong&gt;Message&lt;/strong&gt; field.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on&amp;nbsp;the &lt;strong&gt;Send&lt;/strong&gt; button to send the message.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(264,'132','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;When the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Online User Log&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option in the Customer Configuration is selected, the system will log all users when they visit your site. This page will display all users that are currently viewing your gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Session ID&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Visitor&#039;s current session ID. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Username&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Visitor&#039;s username. When users login to the system, the username will be logged. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Current Page&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The page the visitor is currently viewing. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Referred URL &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The URL that the user visited before browsing to the current page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;IP Address&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Visitor&#039;s IP Address &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Visit Time&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Visitor&#039;s visit time &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view more details of a particular user, click on the &lt;strong&gt;View Details&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/zoom_in.gif&quot; alt=&quot;zoom out&quot; /&gt; icon. The system will list all pages that the selected user has browsed in your gallery. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To instruct the system to ignore a particular IP Address, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Ignore IP&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/ignore_ip.gif&quot; alt=&quot;ignore ip&quot; /&gt; icon. The system will not log user info for visitors from this IP once the IP Address has been added to the Ignore IP Address List. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view all user&#039;s history click on the &lt;strong&gt;User Logs&lt;/strong&gt; link. The &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Maximum Number of Logs per User&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is configured in the General Configuration. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To View the&lt;strong&gt; Ignore IP &lt;/strong&gt;address list click on the &quot;Ignore IP&quot; link. You are able to add or remove IPs from it as desired. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; a log from the database, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(265,'146','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page will display&amp;nbsp;all previous last visited pages&amp;nbsp;for all users.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Online Users&lt;/strong&gt; link to see who is currently browsing your gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To View the&lt;strong&gt; Ignore IP &lt;/strong&gt;address list click on the &quot;Ignore IP&quot; link. You are able to add or remove IPs from it as desired. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view more details of a particular user, click on the &lt;strong&gt;View Details&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/zoom_in.gif&quot; alt=&quot;zoom out&quot; /&gt; icon. The system will list all pages that the selected user has browsed in your gallery. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To instruct the system to ignore a particular IP Address, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Ignore IP&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/ignore_ip.gif&quot; alt=&quot;ignore ip&quot; /&gt; icon. The system will not log user info for visitors from this IP once the IP Address has been added to the Ignore IP Address List. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; a log from the database, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system uses the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Maximum Number of Logs per User&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;&amp;nbsp;value that is set&amp;nbsp;in the General Configuration to store site logs for each user.&amp;nbsp;When&amp;nbsp;the log count&amp;nbsp;reaches this value, the&amp;nbsp;system will delete&amp;nbsp;an old log and append the new one to the database.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(266,'150','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;The Ignore IP Address (by-pass) page allows you to tell the system not to log any activities that are from a particular IP Address. When a user visits your site, the system will locate&amp;nbsp;their IP Address and check it against&amp;nbsp;the Ignore&amp;nbsp;IP Address list. If the IP Address is in the list,&amp;nbsp;the system&amp;nbsp;will skip the log function. You&amp;nbsp;can use this feature to ignore&amp;nbsp;search engine IP Addresses.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Online Users&lt;/strong&gt; link to see who is currently browsing your gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view all previous online user logs, click on the &lt;strong&gt;User Logs&lt;/strong&gt; link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To remove a&amp;nbsp;particular IP Address from the &lt;strong&gt;Ignore IP&lt;/strong&gt; list (by-pass), click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To empty all IP Address in the Ignore IP list (by-pass), click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;empty&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To add a new IP Address to the Ignore IP list (by-pass), enter the IP Address to the provided&amp;nbsp;input field and click on the &lt;strong&gt;ADD&lt;/strong&gt; button.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(267,'137','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;This function allows you to import photographer hi-res images from photographer&#039;s directory under the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; directory to the system. When a new photographer is added to the system, it will automatically create a new folder under the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder with the photographer&#039;s username. You can take advantage of this feature, by creating an FTP account for each photographer and grant the permission on their folder only. If you are not sure how to create FTP accounts, you will need to contact your hosting provider for assistance. In doing so, each photographer would be able to use their FTP account to upload their hi-res images to your server. Using an FTP client to upload hi-res images to the server is more efficient than doing so via your web browser. The admin user or photographer is able to import the hi-res images to the gallery as desired once their hi-res images have been upload to the server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;This feature will automatically generate the download files, the display files and the thumbnail files from the high-resolution images that are uploaded to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;upload&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder. This option is only available when you have ImageMagick&amp;copy; Installed on your server and you have input the correct path in the Media Configuration. Also, the system only supports JPG or JPEG file formats when using this feature. The system will only generate the download files when the uploaded hi-res image satisfies the minimum dimension that are configured in the Product Type section. When there is no instant download configured for a particular product type, the system would recognize it as a print or delivery product and it would not generate the download files for these product types. Also, if you don&#039;t have any product types added when importing the hi-res images to the gallery, the system won&#039;t be able to generate the download files and you will need to manually generate the download files for the display images later if you want to offer them.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Download&lt;/strong&gt; Images will be generated based on the instant download dimensions that you have configured for the particular product type. A product type with no instant download dimensions will be recognized as print product, so no download image will be generated for that product type.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display&lt;/strong&gt; images will be generated based on the &quot;Resize To&quot; dimension that is configured in the Media Configuration section.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Thumbnails&lt;/strong&gt; will be generated based on the Thumbnail Configuration that is in the Media Configuration section.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the hi-res image system name to view&amp;nbsp;the full details &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Import &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to import the selected hi-res image into the&amp;nbsp;gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Delete &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the hi-res image from your server.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(268,'133','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to send an email or newsletter to the Photographers (Contributors).&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the email format. You can choose from either HTML or Plain Text for the outgoing email. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the return email address into the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;From&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; field. The return email address is the email address that customers would use if they wanted to reply to your message after receiving it.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the customer group in the &lt;strong&gt;&quot;To&quot; &lt;/strong&gt;drop down list. (Active Photographers, Pending Photographers or All Photographers).&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Subject&lt;/strong&gt; of the message.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the message body into the &lt;strong&gt;Message&lt;/strong&gt; field.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SEND&lt;/strong&gt; button, to send the message.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(269,'141','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;The system needs the photographer&#039;s first name and last name to display in the gallery when you enable the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Photographer Marquee Listing&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option in the Photographer Configuration.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Select the Mapping Field name in the drop down list and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(270,'111','lightbox','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page lists all media of send to friend selected lightbox session ID.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;With the Ent. version you are able to create a new order or upload the selected download files to a remote FTP server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Select the images that you want to create an order for and click on the &lt;strong&gt;Create Order &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;img title=&quot;Create Order&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/shopping-cart2.gif&quot; alt=&quot;Create Order&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to create the new order. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Select the instant download images that you want to upload to the remote FTP server and click on the FTP Syndication &lt;img title=&quot;FTP Syndication&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/upload_server.gif&quot; alt=&quot;FTP Syndication&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon. You will be able to add the FTP login details on the following screen.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(271,'308','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;System currently supports two Printing Fulfillment Providers.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Bay Photo &lt;/strong&gt;-&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.bayphoto.com/&quot; target=&quot;_top&quot;&gt; http://www.bayphoto.com/&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Bay Photo offers complete pro lab services to professional photographers throughout the United States and around the world &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Frontline System&lt;/strong&gt; - &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.frontlinesystem.com&quot; target=&quot;top&quot;&gt;http://www.frontlinesystem.com&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Frontline is a completely automatic workflow solution for photo lab&amp;#039;s including online ordering and centralized image management.	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Product Codes&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	You must have Printing Product Codes for any stockbox printed product types. Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; to updates printing products code for selected stockbox product type.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(272,'309frontline','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to add Printing Fulfillment Product Codes for the selected Stockbox Product Type. You should receive&amp;nbsp;the Printing Product Codes from the provider when you sign up with them.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Frontline System &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system requires only one product code (batch code) for its Product Type. You should request the available product codes from&amp;nbsp;Frontline. Enter the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Product Code&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; (batch code) to the provided&amp;nbsp;input field and click on the SUBMIT button.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system will use the provider product codes when it processes the print fulfillment for a particular order. The provider&#039;s XML data is manageable in the &lt;strong&gt;Order Manager&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;r&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Printing Manager&lt;/strong&gt; section.&amp;nbsp;By default the basic XML data would be included in the system once you install the Stockbox software as&amp;nbsp;well as the product variables. You may only need to update your account info to this XML data and leave other parts unchanged.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(273,'201','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Product Label&lt;/strong&gt; for the selected Language and click on the SUBMIT button. The system will use this label instead of default one (English) when users are browsing the gallery using this selected language.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(274,'313','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;When using the Hi-res Import (Ent. version) function, the&amp;nbsp;system will only recognize a particular product type as an&amp;nbsp;instant download type when it has an instant download configuration set to it. The download file will be generated based on the configuration that you set&amp;nbsp;on this page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;span id=&quot;label_dimension&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Longest Dimension&lt;/strong&gt; (pixels)&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br /&gt;The system will resize the longest dimension of the hi-res image to the size entered&amp;nbsp;in this field. The system will maintain the aspect ratio of the images during the resize process.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;e.g.&lt;/strong&gt; If you enter 500 Pixels and the hi-res image size is 1772px by 1186px. Then the system will re-size the image to 500px by 334px for its download file&amp;nbsp;for this Product Type &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;PPI&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  The system will set this PPI for the download image when it resizes the original image. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Quality&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  The system will set this Quality Value for download image when it resizes the original image.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Original File&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Tick this checkbox when you want the system to use the original image for the download file. You must specify the &quot;&lt;span id=&quot;label_dimension2&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Resolution Minimum Value&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&quot;&amp;nbsp;when choosing this option. The system will only assign this product type when the hi-res image minimum dimension meets this minimum value. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save instant download configuration.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(275,'208','subscription','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to create a new subscription order forA particular customer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the customer&#039;s username from the list or click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;Add&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to add a new customer to the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the status for the new order. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Once&amp;nbsp;the order&amp;nbsp;is completed, the selected customer is able to use the subscription to purchase or download media from the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(276,'201','packages','admin','&lt;p&gt;Enter the package description label for the selected language in the provided text field. The system will use this label instead of default one (English) when user selects this language in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(277,'122','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;Enter virtual CD label and its description  for selected language in the provided text fields. System will use this label and description instead of default one (English) when user selects this language in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(278,'130','virtual_cd','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to add an access user(s) to the selected private virtual CD.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The system provides two options to add access user(s) to the private virtual CD.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Registered User Access&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The System allows you to add existing registered customers to the private virtual CD. Once it&#039;s added to the system, users need to login with the username/password that they created when they registered to your site. The advantage of this option is that the system doesn&#039;t require a second login for purchasing media.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Non-Registered User Access&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This option requires that you create a username/password combination for the user. After logging into the private virtual CD, access user(s) are able to browse the contents of the private virtual CD, but in order to make a purchase they will need to register to system. The advantage of using this option is that you can create a username/password combination to give out to your clients at an event, or have multiple users login to view media using the same user/pass.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to add the new access user to the database.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To remove an access user, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon for the user that you wish to remove.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To access a private virtual CD, click on the Private virtual CD link in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(279,'113','right_managed','admin','&lt;p&gt;When customers requests a license quote in the gallery, the system will send an email to the admin with the license request info and it will also store&amp;nbsp;the info in&amp;nbsp;the database. This page will list all license quote requests from customers. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To view the media details click on its ID.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To delete a particular license quote request, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(280,'111','right_managed','admin','&lt;ul style=&quot;list-style-type: disc;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Don&#039;t Display Rights-Managed Pricing Calculator&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will remove the license selection and &quot;Add to Cart&quot; button from the rights-managed media detail page. Users won&#039;t be able to make license selections or purchase this media from the gallery. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable License Selection in media &quot;Request a Quote&quot;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will display the license selection on the Request a Quote page in the gallery. Users are able to select the license from the drop down list before sending their request. The request will be logged in the database and you can view the user license request history in the Quote Request Logs section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(281,'tpv','gateway','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page is used to input your cajAstur account details.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Provider Name&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;Enter your payment gateway name here. This name will be displayed on the checkout page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Order&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;Enter a unique number here. On the checkout page, all available payment gateways will be displayed in ascending order based on this Display Order number. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;TPV Posted URL&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the Posted URL that you have from the gateway provider.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;TPV Merchant ID&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the merchant ID that you have from the gateway provider.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;TPV Acquirer Bin&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the Acquirer Bin that you have from the gateway provider.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;TPV Terminal #&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the Terminal # that you have from the gateway provider.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;TPV Encryption Key&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the encryption key that you have from the gateway provider.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;TPV Currency Code&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the currency code.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;When customers complete their payment, the&amp;nbsp;system needs the gateway to post back the data to the&amp;nbsp;system to update &amp;amp; complete customer&#039;s&amp;nbsp;order. The gateway provider needs this URL to send back the&amp;nbsp;data. The URL should be as follows:&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;http://www.yourdomain.com/path-to-stockbox/activate_tpv.php&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(282,'125','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;The Static Content Manager allows you to manage the &#039;static&#039; info pages in your gallery. During the installation, the system will automatically create three static pages (About Us, Contact Us and Order Info) in the system. A &#039;static&#039; page is an extra page for static (non gallery) content that you can use to provide additional information on other products or services that you offer.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;About Us&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This page content is used for the About Us page in the gallery.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Contact Us&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This page content is used for the Contact Us page in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Order Information&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;This page content is used for the Order Information page in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;The &lt;strong&gt;URL Address&lt;/strong&gt; is the URL that links to the target static content page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Edit &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to update particular pages with your contents &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To add a new static page to the system, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(283,'128','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;Replace the existing static content with your new content and click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To insert images into a static page you will need to upload them first to the server using the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Upload Images&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; button. Your uploaded images will be displayed in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Uploaded Images&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; tab and you can also view the actual URL for the image. You will need to insert the URL into the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Image URL&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; field that will be displayed after clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Insert / edit Image&lt;/strong&gt; icon in the Tiny MCE Editor menu.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The following call tags are available for use on any static content page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;LIST-STYLE-TYPE: disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PAYMENTMETHOD_LINK]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Payment Method link when the gallery is displayed. The contents of &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Payment Method&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/others/user_switch_payment_method.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. This feature allows customers to switch the payment methods used to make purchases. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PREVIEW_TOGGLE]&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Quick Preview Toggle Link when the gallery is displayed. The contents of &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Quick Preview Toggle&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/media_manager/preview_media_toggle_link.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[SHOPPINGCARTSTATS]&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the customer&#039;s shopping cart details. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Shopping Cart Stats&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/others/user_shopping_cart_stats.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[KEYWORDSEARCH]&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Quick Search form when the gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Quick Search&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; form is in the template &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/tpl/english/others/user_quick_search_form.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[ADVANCED_SEARCH_LINK]&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Advanced Search link when the gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Advanced Search&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link form is in the template &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/user_advanced_search_link.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PRIVATE_LOGIN] &lt;/strong&gt;(Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Private Login link when the gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Private Login&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/english/others/private_login.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PHOTOGRAPHER_LOGIN]&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Photographer Login link when the gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer Login&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/english/others/photographer_login.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[CATEGORYDROPDOWN]&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the gallery categories. There are two display options for the gallery categories. &lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp; &lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Drop Down List Style&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system displays the gallery categories in an drop down list.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Listing Style&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system displays the gallery categories in a listing style. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Category Smarty Template&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The contents of &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Category Listing&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/others/user_main_cat.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and &quot;tpl/english/others/user_sub_categories.tpl&quot; templates.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[FEATURED_MEDIA_RSS]&lt;/strong&gt; (Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Featured Media RSS Icon when the gallery is displayed. The contents for the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Featured Media&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; RSS link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/english/rss/user_featured_media_rss.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[FEATUREDMEDIA] &lt;/strong&gt;(Pro. &amp;amp; Ent. versions)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the gallery featured media. You can change the number of featured media that are displayed in this area by changing the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Featured Media Display Number&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; in the Media Configuration section. You can also change the setting to have the featured media displayed vertically in a column or horizontally in a row. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Featured Media&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/others/user_featured_media.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[VIRTUAL_CD_RSS]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Virtual CD RSS link when the gallery is displayed. The contents for the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/english/rss/user_featured_virtual_cd_rss.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[VIRTUAL_CD]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the &quot;&lt;strong style=&quot;FONT-WEIGHT: 400&quot;&gt;Virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; products when the gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; products is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/english/others/user_featured_virtual_cd.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PORTFOLIO]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with all featured portfolios when gallery is displayed. The contents for each &lt;strong&gt;&quot;Featured Portfolio&quot;&lt;/strong&gt; is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;template/english/portfolio_thumbnail.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PHOTOGRAPHER_LISTING_RSS]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the Photographer RSS link when gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; link is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;tpl/english/rss/user_photographer_list_rss.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PHOTOGRAPHER]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag with the &quot;Featured Photographer Listing&quot; when the gallery is displayed. The contents of the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Featured Photographer Listing&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; is in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;./tpl/english/others/user_photographer_list.tpl&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; template. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;[PREDEFINDED_KEYWORD]&lt;/strong&gt; (Ent. version)&lt;br /&gt;The system will replace this call tag all of the predefined keywords that are entered in the &lt;strong&gt;Search Manager &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/errow.gif&quot; alt=&quot;arrow&quot; /&gt; Pre-defined Keywords&lt;/strong&gt; section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(284,'126','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to add new static pages to the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Page Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Enter the name for this page. You should use unique name for each static page. If your have SEO turn ON system will use as the page name in the URL.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Editor&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	To switch to non-html editor select Basic TEXT AREA to edit it in normal method. You can add javascript using this method.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;SEO Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Enter \r\n	title to be used for the meta title tag&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;SEO Meta Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Enter description to be used for meta description tag.\r\n	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;SEO Meta Keywords&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Enter keywords to be used for meta keywords tag.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Body Contents (No HTML Header )&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Since system will use main.tpl template for the output data so you must not have html header for your static page. \r\n	You should only add your contents to the &amp;quot;PLEASE ADD YOUR...&amp;quot; section and leave other parts as they are. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n	&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	You can remove call tags if you don&amp;#039;t want the corresponding feature to be displayed on the new static page. You are not able to add the header or footer to the static page, as the system uses only one header and footer for the entire site. The header and footer are in the &lt;strong&gt;main.tpl &lt;/strong&gt;template and all content for the static page will be loaded into the &lt;strong&gt;[BODY]&lt;/strong&gt; call tag in the main.tpl template when the page is called by the user.    &lt;br /&gt;\r\n	&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	To insert images into a static page you will need to upload them first to the server using the &amp;quot;&lt;strong&gt;Upload Images&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;quot; button. Your uploaded images will be displayed in the &amp;quot;&lt;strong&gt;Uploaded Images&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;quot; tab and you can also view the actual URL for the image. You will need to insert the URL into the &amp;quot;&lt;strong&gt;Image URL&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;quot; field that will be displayed after clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Insert / edit Image&lt;/strong&gt; icon in the Tiny MCE Editor menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(285,'130','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;To cancel the delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To confirm the delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Once you confirm&amp;nbsp;the delete action, the system will delete the selected static page from the system and also delete any URL links that link to this static page.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(286,'100','news','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage the News items in your gallery. You can add as many news items as you wish to the system. All active news items will be listed on the News page in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To specify that a particular news is to be featured, click on the&lt;strong&gt; No&lt;/strong&gt; link in the Featured column. The Featured News will be listed on the home page in the Latest News section. Only one featured news item can be specified at a time. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Status&lt;/strong&gt; link to change the status of the particular news item to be &lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt; or &lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt;. Only active news items will be displayed in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Edit&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;dit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to edit a particular news item.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to delete a particular news item.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Upload&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/upload.gif&quot; alt=&quot;upload&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to upload images to the server for later use.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon to add a new news item to the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To configure how the system handles the News items in the gallery, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/configure.gif&quot; alt=&quot;configure&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Configuration&lt;/strong&gt; link.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(287,'101','news','admin','&lt;p&gt;When adding or editing a News item, you will need to input the following.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the news &lt;strong&gt;Title&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Short Content&lt;/strong&gt;. The short content will be used as the news summary.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the full &lt;strong&gt;Content&lt;/strong&gt;. The full content will be used when users click on a particular news item to view the full details. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To insert images into a news item you will need to upload them first to the server by clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Upload News Media&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/upload.gif&quot; alt=&quot;upload&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon. Your uploaded images will be displayed in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;News Media&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; tab and you can also view the actual URL for the image. You will need to insert the URL into the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Image URL&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; field that will be displayed after clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Insert / edit Image&lt;/strong&gt; icon in the Tiny MCE Editor menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To go back to News Manager click on the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;News Manager&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; tab. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to add a new News item to the system. The status of the new News item will be &lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt; and you will need to change this to &lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt; before it will display in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(288,'111','news','admin','&lt;p&gt;Before you&amp;nbsp;can insert&amp;nbsp;images into the&amp;nbsp;News page you must first upload the images&amp;nbsp;to your server. All uploaded images will be uploaded to the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;images/news&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; folder on the server.&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to browse to&amp;nbsp;the image on your local computer and&amp;nbsp;click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To view an uploaded image, click&amp;nbsp;on&amp;nbsp;the &lt;strong&gt;View&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/search2.gif&quot; alt=&quot;view&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete an&amp;nbsp;uploaded image from the server, click on the &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;elete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(289,'107','news','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Number of News items per Page&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the number of news to be listed on the News page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;News Default Sort Field Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the default sort field name that&amp;nbsp;will be&amp;nbsp;used to sort the displayed news items on the News page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;News Default Sort Order Direction&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the default sort order direction that&amp;nbsp;will be&amp;nbsp;used to sort the&amp;nbsp;displayed news items on the News page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Latest News&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Select the latest news option that the system will use for the Latest News section on the home page. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Number of Latest News&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  Enter the number of news to be listed in the Featured List section.\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(290,'103','news','admin','&lt;p&gt;To cancel the delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To confirm the delete action, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(291,'134','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;Using the Navigation Menu Dropdown option, you can categorize gallery menus into one menu group.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The HOME, GALLERY, LIGHTBOX, PRODUCTS, MY ACCOUNT, SHOPPING CART, NEWS (Ent. version), PORTFOLIO (Ent. version) and ABOUT US menus items are installed automatically when the Stockbox system is installed on your server.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul type=&quot;disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Menu Label&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system uses this label in the menu navigation item label.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Parent Label&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When a particular menu label is under another parent label other than the TOP label, users must mouse over the parent label to see this sub menu item label. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;URL Address&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The URL Address that links to this menu label.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Target&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Your web browser uses this option to open the URL in a new window, current window or parent window.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Position&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Position of menu item label.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Added Date&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The date that the label was added to the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system only displays a menu item label when its status is Active.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Edit&lt;/strong&gt; a particular menu item label, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; a particular menu item label, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Add&lt;/strong&gt; a new menu label to the system, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;View&lt;/strong&gt; the navigation menu layout, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/searchable_icon.gif&quot; alt=&quot;VIEW&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(292,'113','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;When adding a&amp;nbsp;new navigation menu item, system will ask you for the parent group (level). The &quot;Top&quot; is the main group and any menu item that is in the TOP group will be displayed when the gallery is displayed in your web browser. Other groups (levels) will be displayed when you mouse over the parent group label like the Gallery&amp;nbsp;menu item.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;list-style-type: disc;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Group Label - &lt;/strong&gt;Enter the group label for the new navigation menu item. The system will use this label in the navigation menu in the gallery. You can update it for the other languages (if applicable) later once it has been added to the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;URL - &lt;/strong&gt;You can either enter the URL directly into the input field or select the page in the next dropdown list. The pages in the dropdown list are all internal static pages that you have added in the Static Contents Manager and also the Stockbox default pages. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Target &lt;/strong&gt;- Select the target command in the drop down list. The system will use this value for the target in the &amp;lt;a&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;_self: Browser will open the new page in the current window. &lt;br /&gt;_parent: Browser will open the new page in the parent window.&lt;br /&gt;_top: Browser will open the new page at the top of window.&lt;br /&gt;_blank: Browser will open the new page in a new window.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Parent Group - &lt;/strong&gt;Select the parent group for this new menu. If this menu is under any group besides the TOP group, then users must mouse over that navigation menu before being able to access this new navigation menu item. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;When adding a new menu group label, the&amp;nbsp;status will be &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; until you&amp;nbsp;change&amp;nbsp;the status in the Gallery Navigation Menu Manager section.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to add the new menu item. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(293,'132','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;This page shows you how the navigation menu drop down will be structured in the gallery navigation menu when it is loaded in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(294,'115','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;When updating a group label you&amp;nbsp;can select the language for the group label. The system will use the correct group label when users select this language in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul style=&quot;list-style-type: disc;&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Group Label - &lt;/strong&gt;Enter the group label for&amp;nbsp;the navigation menu item. The system will use this label in the navigation menu in the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;URL - &lt;/strong&gt;You can either enter the URL directly into the input field or select the page in the next dropdown list. The pages in the dropdown list are all internal static pages that you have added in the Static Contents Manager and also the Stockbox default pages. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Target &lt;/strong&gt;- Select the target command in the drop down list. The system will use this value for the target in the &amp;lt;a&amp;gt; tag.&lt;br /&gt;_self: Browser will open the new page in the current window. &lt;br /&gt;_parent: Browser will open the new page in the parent window.&lt;br /&gt;_top: Browser will open the new page at the top of window.&lt;br /&gt;_blank: Browser will open the new page in a new window.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Parent Group - &lt;/strong&gt;Select the parent group. If this menu is under any group besides the TOP group, then users must mouse over that navigation menu before being able to access this new navigation menu item.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;After editing the input&amp;nbsp;fields,&amp;nbsp;click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button&amp;nbsp;and the system will update the new data to the selected group label accordingly.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(295,'117','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel&amp;nbsp;the delete action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm&amp;nbsp;the delete action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will also delete all of its sub menus from the system if&amp;nbsp;applicable.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(296,'111','administrator','admin','&lt;p&gt;When users request for an admin passsword in the gallery, the system will log&amp;nbsp;their IP Address. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To lookup the &quot;who is&quot; details for a particular IP Address, click on&amp;nbsp;the IP Address hyperlink.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(297,'100','database','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage the database backup files.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/database.gif&quot; alt=&quot;db backup&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to start a new database backup.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/download.gif&quot; alt=&quot;download&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to download the backup zip file to your local computer.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to restore a backup database zip file. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;elete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the backup zip file.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(298,'101','database','admin','&lt;p&gt;The system will list all tables&amp;nbsp;in the Stockbox database. If you have other system using the same Stockbox database, you&amp;nbsp;will see its tables listed here too.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Tick on the checkbox&amp;nbsp;for any tables that you want to backup. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the backup name in the Backup Name field.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the SUBMIT button to start the backup process.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Depending on the size of your database, it may take&amp;nbsp;a little while&amp;nbsp;for the backup process to complete and it may timeout during the backup process. If this&amp;nbsp;occurs, since the &lt;strong&gt;vss_media&lt;/strong&gt; and&lt;strong&gt; vss_category&lt;/strong&gt; tables would hold the most&amp;nbsp;data,&amp;nbsp;you should backup these tables separately to avoid the timeout issue.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will store the backup file&amp;nbsp;in the &quot;tmp/backup&quot; directory on your server. We recommend that you&amp;nbsp;download this backup file to your local computer for&amp;nbsp;safe keeping.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(299,'104','database','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to restore your backup data to the current database. After you click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon, the system will replace the current database data with data&amp;nbsp;in the backup file. You can&#039;t recover current database data once the backup has been restored. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;To restore&amp;nbsp;a backup file from your local computer, you must first upload it to the &quot;tmp/backup&quot; directory. The system will list the file&amp;nbsp;on the Database Backup Manager page for you to restore it.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the restore database action.&lt;br /&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the restore database action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(300,'115','administrator','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Blacklisted IP Address Checking&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will activate the Blacklisted IP Address function when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable Malicious Character Checking&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will activate the Malicious Character checking function when this option is enabled.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;span lang=&quot;EN-CA&quot; xml:lang=&quot;EN-CA&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Allow Admin Users Access to New Private Categories&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When this option is enabled, the system will automatically add the admin users to the newly created&amp;nbsp;private categories.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(301,'139','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;The system will log the&amp;nbsp;FTP Syndication actions whenever the admin&amp;nbsp;or customer is using the FTP Synidcation function to upload the hi-res&amp;nbsp;files&amp;nbsp;to the remote FTP Server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To re-upload the hi-res download files to the customer&#039;s remote FTP server, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/upload.gif&quot; alt=&quot;upload&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To delete&amp;nbsp;a particular&amp;nbsp;FTP Syndication log, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To empty all FTP Syndication logs, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/trash.gif&quot; alt=&quot;empty&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(302,'140','customer','admin','&lt;p&gt;By default system will load the customer FTP information that is configured in the customer profile to the remote FTP information fields. However you can change this information to another server as&amp;nbsp;desired and click on the SUBMIT button. The system will upload&amp;nbsp;the hi-res download&amp;nbsp;files to the input FTP server.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(303,'0','rss','admin','&lt;p&gt;Use the RSS Feed Configuration to manage how the system&amp;nbsp;will generate the RSS feed for the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Featured Media RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Featured Media RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove the RSS Feed icon in the Featured Media column in the gallery. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Current Featured Media Setting&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the same method that you have configured&amp;nbsp;in the Featured Media&amp;nbsp;section of&amp;nbsp;the Media Configuration&amp;nbsp;when users click on the Featured Media RSS Feed Icon.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;List all Featured Media&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will list all Featured Media in the database when users click on the Featured Media RSS Icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Thes system will use this title for the Featured Media RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this description for the&amp;nbsp;Featured Media RSS page. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Category Listing RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Category Listing RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove the RSS Feed icon on the Category listing page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Current Gallery Listing Page&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the current contents of the selected category for the the Category RSS Feed Page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;List all Contents of current viewed category&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will list all contents (sub-categories, media) of the current viewed category for the Category RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Default Title&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the default title&amp;nbsp;that you enter in the RSS Default Title&amp;nbsp;field for the Category RSS page title.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Name&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the category display name&amp;nbsp;for the Category RSS page title.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the category description for the Category RSS page title.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Default Description&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the default description&amp;nbsp;that you enter in the RSS Default Description&amp;nbsp;field for the Category RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Name&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the category description for the Category RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the&amp;nbsp;category description for the Category RSS page description.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Default Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this default title when you choose the &quot;Use default title&quot; option in the RSS Title option. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Default Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this default description when you choose the&amp;nbsp;&quot;Use default description&quot; in the RSS Description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Virtual CD RSS&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove the RSS Feed icon from the Virtual CD column in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use Current Virtual CD Listing Option&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use the current setting that you have configured&amp;nbsp;in the Virtual CD Configuration when generating the Virtual CD&amp;nbsp;RSS page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;List all virtual CD&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will list all Virtual CD on the RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The System will use this title for the Virtual CD RSS page title.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this description for the&amp;nbsp;Virtual CD RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer Listing RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer Listing RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove the RSS Feed icon from the Photographers column in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use current featured photographer listing option&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will use current settings of the photographer listing option when generating the Photographer Listing RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this title for the Photographer Listing&amp;nbsp;RSS page title.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this description for the Photographer Listing RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New Media RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New Media RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove RSS Feed icon from the New Additions page in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use the current New Media listing page&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will generate the New Media RSS&amp;nbsp;page based on the number of&amp;nbsp;media on current page&amp;nbsp;of the New Additions listing page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;List all media&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will list all media on the New Additions pages for the New Media RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this title for the New Media RSS page title.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this description for the New Media RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Popular Media RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp; \r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Popular Media RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove the RSS Feed icon from the Most Popular page in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use the current Popular Media listing page&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will generate the&amp;nbsp;Popular Media&amp;nbsp;RSS&amp;nbsp; page based on the number of&amp;nbsp;media on the current page of the&amp;nbsp;Most Popular media listing page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;List all media&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will list all media on the Most Popular page for&amp;nbsp;Popular Media RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this title for&amp;nbsp;Popular Media RSS page title.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this description for the&amp;nbsp;Popular Media RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;News RSS&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;News RSS&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will remove the RSS Feed icon from the News page in the gallery.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Use the current News listing page&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will generate the News&amp;nbsp;RSS&amp;nbsp;page based on the number of&amp;nbsp;current news items that&amp;nbsp;are on&amp;nbsp;the News listing page.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;List all media&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will list all news on the News page for the News RSS page.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Title&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this title for the News RSS page title.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;RSS Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system will use this description for the News RSS page description.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(304,'213','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;The global update feature allows you to update the media properties for your media in an entire category (including sub-categories if selected) or selected media. With this feature, you will be able to update the following media data fields:&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Name&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Author&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Photographer Username&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Copyright&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Keywords&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;# Hits &lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed with no Calculator&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Royalty Free&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed &amp;amp; Royalty Free&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Release&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Orientation&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Black &amp;amp; White&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Only use this feature if you want to add the same common information to every image in a category or selected media such as Author, Copyright and Rights Managed or Royalty Free etc.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the category in the &lt;strong&gt;Category&lt;/strong&gt; dropdown menu.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Global Update Type&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; in the drop down list. This dropdown will only display if you are updating selected media. To update a category of media, choose the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Update Selected Category&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option, or to update a group of selected media, choose the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Updated Selected Media&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; option.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the desired field in the &lt;strong&gt;Field Name&lt;/strong&gt; dropdown list.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Check the &lt;strong&gt;Including Subcategories&lt;/strong&gt; checkbox, if you want to update all subcategories of the target Category.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Check the &lt;strong&gt;Over Write Old Data&lt;/strong&gt; box, to overwrite any existing data, otherwise leave this box un-checked and the new data will be appended to the existing data. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the &lt;strong&gt;Global Value&lt;/strong&gt; that you want to set such as Keywords, Description etc.&lt;br /&gt;- For Rights Managed and Royalty Free values are pre-defined, so you can&#039;t change this value&lt;br /&gt;- For Media Release values, you can input one of the following as required. &lt;span id=&quot;global_info&quot;&gt;1 = Property Release, 2 = Model Release or 3 = All Release&lt;br /&gt;- For Media Orientation values, you can input one of the following. H = Horizontal, V = Vertical, S = Square, P = Panorama or N = N/A&lt;br /&gt;- For Black &amp;amp; White, you can input one of the following. 1 = Black &amp;amp; White or 0 = No Black &amp;amp; White&lt;br /&gt;- For Media Type, you can enter one of the following. 1 = Image or 2 = Video&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click the &lt;strong&gt;Submit&lt;/strong&gt; button to update the data.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(305,'209','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to import your hi-res images that are residing in your &lt;strong&gt;auto resize hi-res folder&lt;/strong&gt; and have the system&amp;nbsp;automatically generate the download, display and thumbnail images&amp;nbsp;for the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the hi-res image name to view&amp;nbsp;the full details.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Import &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to import the selected hi-res image into the gallery.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the Delete &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the hi-res image from your server.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(306,'210','photographer','photographer','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Input&amp;nbsp;all appropriate values to the&amp;nbsp;provided fields.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the category in the&amp;nbsp;list where the image will be imported to.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter the price&amp;nbsp;for the Product Types that&amp;nbsp;are available for this hi-res image. Enter a price of 0 (zero) to remove a particular product type from the hi-res image.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to import the&amp;nbsp;hi-res image into the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(307,'138','photographer','admin','&lt;p&gt;Once you click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button, the system will perform the following actions.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Move the original selected hi-res image to the download directory under its category directory structure.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Generate the display image and thumbnail. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Generate the download images based on the dimension that you have configured for the&amp;nbsp;particular product type. If no instant download dimensions are configured&amp;nbsp;for your product types, then no download files will be generated. You can tell the system not to generate download files for a particular instant download product type by entering&amp;nbsp;0 (zero)&amp;nbsp;for its price.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: You must have ImageMagick&amp;copy; installed in order to use this function.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(308,'112','menu','admin','&lt;p&gt;Using the Navigation Menu Dropdown option, you can categorize gallery menus into one menu group.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;The HOME, GALLERY, LIGHTBOX, PRODUCTS, MY ACCOUNT, SHOPPING CART, NEWS (Ent. version), PORTFOLIO (Ent. version) and ABOUT US menus items are installed automatically when the Stockbox system is installed on your server.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul type=&quot;disc&quot;&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Menu Label&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system uses this label in the menu navigation item label.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Parent Label&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When a particular menu label is under another parent label other than the TOP label, users must mouse over the parent label to see this sub menu item label. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;URL Address&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The URL Address that links to this menu label.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Target&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Your web browser uses this option to open the URL in a new window, current window or parent window.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Position&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Position of menu item label.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Added Date&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The date that the label was added to the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Active&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;The system only displays a menu item label when its status is Active.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Edit&lt;/strong&gt; a particular menu item label, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Delete&lt;/strong&gt; a particular menu item label, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;Add&lt;/strong&gt; a new menu label to the system, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To &lt;strong&gt;View&lt;/strong&gt; the navigation menu layout, click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/searchable_icon.gif&quot; alt=&quot;VIEW&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(309,'222','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Using this page to manage your portfolio.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Add Portfolio&lt;/strong&gt; icon to add a new Portfolio.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/english/user_profile.gif&quot; alt=&quot;profile&quot; /&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Update Portfolio Profile&lt;/strong&gt;&amp;nbsp;icon to update your Portfolio Profile.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Portfolio Name&lt;/strong&gt; to add Portfolio Media.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;strong&gt; Edit&lt;/strong&gt; icon to edit the particular Portfolio.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;strong&gt; Delete&lt;/strong&gt; icon to delete a particular portfolio&amp;nbsp;and its contents from the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;',NULL,NULL),(310,'223','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to&amp;nbsp;add a new portfolio or update an existing portfolio.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;PADDING-LEFT: 30px&quot;&gt;Enter the name for your Portfolio.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;PADDING-LEFT: 30px&quot;&gt;Select the icon for your Portfolio.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Do Not Use Icon&lt;br /&gt;The system will not use an icon for this portfolio if this option is selected. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Use Random Image&lt;br /&gt;The system will use a random thumbnail image&amp;nbsp;from&amp;nbsp;this portfolio for its icon if this option is selected.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Icon Name&lt;br /&gt;Select an icon from the list. You&amp;nbsp;can to upload your own icon to the server using the Upload Icon function. Once it&#039;s uploaded&amp;nbsp;to the server, the system will list the icon&amp;nbsp;in the dropdown&amp;nbsp;menu for you to select.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/blockquote&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;NOTE&lt;/strong&gt;: Your new portfolio will have a &lt;strong&gt;Hidden&lt;/strong&gt; status when it&#039;s added to the system and will not display in the gallery until it is activated by the site admin.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(311,'227','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to update your Portfolio&amp;nbsp;in another language.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;Enter the&amp;nbsp;Portfolio name in the selected language and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. The system will use this name when users are&amp;nbsp;browing the gallery using the selected language. By default, the system will use the default language (English) for the Portfolio&amp;nbsp;name in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(312,'225','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the Delete Action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the Delete Action.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: The system will delete all media&amp;nbsp;for the&amp;nbsp;selected portfolio from the database and system when you confirm the Delete Action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(313,'229','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage your Portfolio media. There are two ways to Add Media to a particular portfolio.&lt;br /&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;1. From media in the gallery.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;PADDING-LEFT: 30px&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add Portfolio Media from Gallery&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add_new_media.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;2. By uploading media from your desktop.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p style=&quot;PADDING-LEFT: 30px&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Add Portfolio Media Manually&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;dit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to update the selected media description.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the selected media from the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(314,'231','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Enter a new description for the selected media and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. The system will use the description when it displays the media in the gallery portfolio.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(315,'233','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Enter a new description for the selected media and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. The system will use the description when it displays the media in the gallery portfolio.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(316,'235','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the Delete Action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;apply&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the Delete Action.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(317,'219','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage your Portfolio Profile Media.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to select&amp;nbsp;the media on your local computer&amp;nbsp;and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to upload the new media to the server. Once it&#039;s uploaded on the server, you&amp;nbsp;will be able to&amp;nbsp;view the&amp;nbsp;URL link displayed in the LINK column. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/search2.gif&quot; alt=&quot;view&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to view the&amp;nbsp;media. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the selected media from the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(318,'217','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to manage your Portfolio Profile Content. The Stockbox system doesn&#039;t restrict what file format you can upload to the portfolio as long as you have opening code for it. You can add images, flash files or video to the portfolio. The system will use your opening code for the selected file format.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Select the language in the Language dropdown&amp;nbsp;menu if available.&lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Profile&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;Enter your Profile Content and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to save the changes. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Profile Media&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;To insert images into the Portfolio Profile Content, you will need to upload them first to the server by clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Upload Images&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img style=&quot;vertical-align: top;&quot; src=&quot;images/admin/upload.gif&quot; alt=&quot;upload&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon. Your uploaded images will be displayed in the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Profile Media&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; tab and you can also view the actual URL for the image. You will need to insert the URL into the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Image URL&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; field that will be displayed after clicking on the &lt;strong&gt;Insert / edit Image&lt;/strong&gt; icon in the Tiny MCE Editor menu.&amp;nbsp;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;Click on the&amp;nbsp;&lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to update your profile.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(319,'239','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;Use this page to upload&amp;nbsp;icons for your gallery categories or your portfolio. Once&amp;nbsp;the icons have been&amp;nbsp;uploaded&amp;nbsp;to the server, the system will list them in the icon dropdown&amp;nbsp;menu for you to assign&amp;nbsp;to a&amp;nbsp;particular category or portfolio.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to select&amp;nbsp;the&amp;nbsp;image on your local computer&amp;nbsp;and click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button. You only able to upload, &lt;strong&gt;.gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .png&lt;/strong&gt; file type for icons. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/search2.gif&quot; alt=&quot;view&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to view the selected icon. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;elete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to delete the selected icon from the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(320,'0','import','admin',' &lt;ol&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Media Property FIelds Mapping&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	Using this section to map stockbox media property fields to your Import CSV file column.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n            	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n                	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Enable&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                	  When this checkbox is checked, system will update this field value with the value in the column that you configure for that media property field. By default all checkboxes are checked. To disable particular field from the update simply unticked its checkbox. System will ignore that field from the update process\r\n            	    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Stockbox Media Property Field Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        There are twelve fields that are available for the import function. Each field must be mapped to unique column in your CSV file. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        Select appropriate column in your CSV file for target field. System will use that column value for its mapped media property field.\r\n            	    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Mapping Value&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n            	      There are some fields in the system that require a defined stockbox value like License Type, Orienation. Their defined values might be different with the values that you have in the CSV files. So you must tell the system what value that is being used in your CSV file using the provided fields. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n            	      &lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	          &lt;strong&gt;e.g.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt; \r\n           	        Our system uses 1, 2, 3 and 4 for &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Royalty Free&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;, &quot;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed&lt;/strong&gt;&quot;,           	&quot;&lt;strong&gt;Royalty Free &amp; Rights Managed&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; and           	&quot;&lt;strong&gt;Rights Managed with no Caculator&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; respectively.  If you are using different value in your CSV file like&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        Royalty Free : RF&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        Rights Managed : RM&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        Royalty Free &amp; Rights Managed: RFRM&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        Rights Managed with no Caculator : RMWC&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        &lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        Then you must enter these values to the Mapping Value Fields. System uses these input values against your CSV file to update correct value to the system.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n           	        &lt;br /&gt;\r\n            	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n            \r\n            &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Primary Configuration&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n            System needs a primary value for the import. The primary field value must be unique in the system. You should select the column in your CSV that has unique value and this value must exists in the stockbox system. File system name is one that could be used as so as the Media Reference ID. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n              &lt;br /&gt;\r\n            &lt;/li&gt;\r\n            &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Import&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n            You should have properly configured the above before use the import function. System will update database with data that is in the CSV file base on the Mapping Configured above. You can\'t able to restore its original value when the function is executed. \r\n            	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n                	&lt;li&gt;Select CSV file from your local computer and click IMPORT button to update new values to the database.\r\n           	  &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n            &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;/ol&gt;',NULL,NULL),(321,'107','iptc','admin','  Using this page to global update new IPTC Metadata data to all images that are currently in the database. You should only enter new data to fields that you want to update its existing data with new value and leave other fields that are not relevant blank. System only update fields that have a value and keep the current data for any fields that have a blank value.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       &lt;br /&gt;\r\n       &lt;br /&gt;\r\n       Note: if your database is large, it will take sometimes for it to complete the update. During the update process your server might timeout before it completes its task. If this case is happening then you might need to refresh your browser a few times for it to complete.',NULL,NULL),(322,'215','media_manager','admin','&lt;p&gt;There might be a case that system can\'t able to import images that are being uploaded by the Lightroom application to the system. If this case is happening then you would see the logs in this page.\r\n        &lt;/p&gt;\r\n	    &lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;To import particular images to the system simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon that is in the Action Column. The import process will be the same as while you upload using Lightroom. System will assign all product types that you have set in your Lightroom for this image and generate download links for instant download product type if apply. \r\n	    &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n        &lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(323,'309','order_manager','admin','Using this page to download order original files&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Invoice&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Tick this checkbox when you want system to include order invoice in the zip file.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;All Original Files&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Tick this checkbox to download all original files of selected order.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\nClick &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/download.gif&quot; alt=&quot;download&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; to download original files and invoice PDF file.',NULL,NULL),(324,'bayphoto','printing','admin','bayphoto',NULL,NULL),(325,'100','rm','admin','&lt;p&gt;\r\n System will use licenses that you create in this page for all rights-managed media in the gallery. &lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n		&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;License Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n		You can create many license cateogries as your desired but you only able to add it in the first level and the third level of license. Any categories that is in the first level will be available for all licenses. User can able to select it regardless of other license option. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        &lt;ul&gt;\r\n       	  &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New License Category&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	You can add new license category to the system eighter using the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; or &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icons that are in the next of &lt;strong&gt;License Option Label.&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n            	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n                	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Manual&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                	Click on this icon to manually add new license label to the system. You should able to add 5 license option labels to the system at a time. Leave blank to any fields that are not needed and click SAVE button. System will add and display new labels in the level that you have selected.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n                    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Import - Batch&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n						Using this function to batch import License Option Label to the system. System should show how many columns that are needed in the CSV file for each import. You can have many rows as you like but CSV file columns should not execeed the number of columns that is shown in the popup window. For License Option Label, the CSV file should contain only one column. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n           	    &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n          &lt;/li&gt;\r\n          &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove License Category&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;remove&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n          Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;remove&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of particular license category to remove it from the system. Once you confirm the remove action, system will remove selected license category and its items if any from the system. it will not show up in the gallery. You can\'t able to remove Usage Type &amp;&nbsp;Details Of Use License Categories from the system. They\'re predefined and required by the system. However you can add license items to them.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n          &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Expand&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/expand.gif&quot; alt=&quot;expand&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n            Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/expand.gif&quot; alt=&quot;expand&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to expand particular license category.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;/li&gt;\r\n          &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Collapse&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/collapse.gif&quot; alt=&quot;collapse&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; &lt;br /&gt;\r\n          Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/collapse.gif&quot; alt=&quot;collapse&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to collapse particular category&lt;/li&gt;\r\n          &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Edit License Category&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n          Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of particular License Category. You should able to edit selected label in other language if there is other language beside English in the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n          &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Instant Download Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n            You can set particular license category as instant download type except the Usage Type Category. Using Instant Download Option to set the download size for purchase license. System will resize the original file or download file that is being assigned to purchase image for the download file. You can only have one License Category as Instant Download Type. You should add Instant Download License Category in the first level of license so that it will be available to all purchase licenses. The download size can be set in the License Item of this License Category.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n            &lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n		&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;License Category Items&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        System will allow you to add License Category Items when its License Category is in the system. Like License Category, you can add many license items to the system as you like. System will display them in the license category drop down box in the gallery for user to select. Each license Item must have Price Ratio. System will multiply this Price Ratio to Base Price of Detail Of Use Item for the purchase license price.\r\n        	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n            	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New License Item&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                You can add new license item to the system eighter using the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; or &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icons that are in the next of&lt;strong&gt; &quot;License Option Name&quot;&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n                	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n                	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Manual&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                	Click on this icon to manually add new license item to the system. You should able to add 5 license items to the system at a time. Leave blank to any fields that are not needed and click SAVE button. System will add and display new items in the License Category Items that you have selected.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n                    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Import - Batch&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/import.gif&quot; alt=&quot;import&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n						Using this function to batch import License Items to the system. System should show how many columns that are needed in the CSV file for each import. You can have many rows as you like but CSV file columns should not execeed the number of columns that is shown in the popup window. For License Items , the CSV file should contain  &lt;strong&gt;2 columns if it\'s not Instant Download Type&lt;/strong&gt;, one for &lt;strong&gt;Label&lt;/strong&gt; and other for &lt;strong&gt;Price Ratio&lt;/strong&gt;. For Download Type, system require three columns in CSV file. The first two is for label and price ratio and the third one should be for the download size of its license item.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	          &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/li&gt;\r\n                &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remove License Item&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;remove&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/del.gif&quot; alt=&quot;remove&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of particular license item to remove it from the system&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Edit License Category&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	    Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of particular license item to edit it. You should able to edit selected item in other language if there is other language beside English in the system. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	    &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Instant Download Size&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	    This option will available when its License Category is a Instant Download Type. Enter the size that for target License Item and click SAVE button to update download size.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	      &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	    &lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	    &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n        &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Usage Type License Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        Usage Type License Category is required by the system. System requires this category in the first level for it to work. User must select its Usage Type Item in order to see Detail Of Use license item.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Details Of Use Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        Details Of Use License Category will be available when you have Usage Type License Item. Each Details Of Use License Item must have a base price. System will multiply all other license option Price Ratio to this Base Price to get the purchased license price.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Incomplete License Error&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        When you see Incomplete License Error display in particular License Category then this category is missing data or it\'s not properly setup. System will not allow user to purchase rights-managed image if this error show up. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;License Purchase Price&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        License Purchase Price is the total of (Base Price ) x (All Other License Item Price Ratio)&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n            	&lt;li&gt;License Purchase Price = (Base Price) x (Item Price Ratio 1) x (Item Price Ratio 2) .... x (Item Price Ratio n)&lt;/li&gt;\r\n                &lt;li&gt;e.g, there are only three Price Ratio Items in the purchase license and they are setup as follow&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n                - Base Price = $300&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                - Item Price Ratio 1 = 100%&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                - Item Price Ratio 2 = 150%&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                - Item Price Ratio 3 = 200%&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n                Then the Purchase Price = (Base Price) x (Price Ratio 1) x  (Price Ration 2) x (Price Ratio 3) = 300 x 1 x 1.5 x 2 = $900.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n                  &lt;br /&gt;\r\n                &lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	    &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n        &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;SAVE&lt;/strong&gt; button&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        Using this button to save all changes that you make in the provided text field in the license item. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n          &lt;br /&gt;\r\n        &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;PREVIEW&lt;/strong&gt; btton&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        This button only shows up when you have completed and properly setup the license. Click on this button to view how the license works in the gallery when one purchase rights-managed image.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(326,'120','portfolio','admin','Using this page to add larger image for particular portfolio image. System will allow user to view this image in the Portfolio. \r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Image&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Current selected image&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Larger Image&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Click browse button to locate larger image for selected image&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;UPLOAD&lt;/strong&gt; button to upload selected image&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(327,'119','portfolio','admin','&lt;p&gt;Browse to target category that contains desired media and tick checkbox of desired media and then click &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add_all.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to add selected media to selected portfolio.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(328,'309bayphoto','product_type','admin','&lt;p&gt;System requires a correct product codes that is provided from Bay Photo provider for stockbox product types. Provider product codes are defined in the &lt;strong&gt;config/bayphoto.config.php&lt;/strong&gt; file. If any product codes that you see is incorrect you must update new code to this file.  You should have a product spreadsheet from Bay Photo after you sign up with them. You should request one if you don\'t have it.\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Bay Photo Product Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    You must select Product Type for Product Size List. Product Size might changes base on its Product Type&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Bay Photo Product Size&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  	Select Product Size for stockbox Product Type. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Bay Photo Print Services&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Depending on the Product Size and Type, you migth see different Print Services display. You only need to add this option when selected stockbox product type needs Print Service.  Simply click on the checkbox of the Print Service and its option to Print Service to selected stockbox product type.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;CURRENT MAPPING CODE&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  	System will automatic populate these fields base on your selection above. You can\'t able to change value of these fields. If you see any incorrect codes show up in these field please update correct codes in the config/bayphoto.config.php.\'&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  	&lt;li&gt;Click SUBMIT button to update Bay Photo Product Codes to selected Stockbox Product Type. System will uses these codes for the printing processing XML file. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(329,'100','p_option','admin','&lt;p&gt;When you need more options for your products then you should using this function to provide more options for your client to choose from. Below is what you need to have for product options to work.\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    The product category is the very first selection that user must select to get product items and more options about products. Using this option to category your products&lt;/li&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Items&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n 	  The Product Items \r\n  is the second selection that user must select to purchase selected media. Using this option to add Products for your media&lt;/li&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n 	  Using this option to add more options to product items. You can use product options to ask image in user lightbox, ask user to input text and more options available when select particular product option. &lt;br /&gt;\r\n 	  &lt;ul&gt;\r\n      	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;User Input&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n      	Using this option to ask for user input for his/her purchase&lt;/li&gt;\r\n      	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Lightbox Contents&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n   	    Using this option to ask for the contents of his/her media for the purchase&lt;/li&gt;\r\n      	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Select&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n      	  Using this option when you have more options under selected option.\r\n      	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n      &lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;strong&gt;Functionality&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New Product Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n  Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the bottom of the page&lt;/li&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New Product Items&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n 	  Simply click on the \r\n    &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Category or click on the Product Category Name hyperlink in the product category column&lt;/li&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Edit Existing Product Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Category&lt;/li&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Delete Existing Product Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Category&lt;/li&gt;\r\n 	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Position Product Category&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/up.gif&quot; alt=&quot;up&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; or &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/down.gif&quot; alt=&quot;down&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icons to move up or down one position. System will list items in the drop down list base on its position&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(330,'101','p_option','admin','Using this page to add new Product Category to the system.&lt;br /&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Category Name&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	&lt;/strong&gt;The name that will be displayed in the Products Drop Down list in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Description that will be displayed when user select this product category in the gallery. Using this field to describe this Product Category.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Available for categories&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	The categoies that this Product Category is available. It can be available for multiple categories, all categories or just one category. System only allows user this product if this product is available for selected media category&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click SUBMIT to add new Product Category to the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: You should able to add other language for this new Product Category in the Edit mode.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(331,'106','p_option','admin','Using this page to manage Product Items of selected Product Category.\r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New Product Item&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the bottom of the page&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;New Product Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Simply click on the \r\n    &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Item in the Action Column or click on Product Item Name hyperlink.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Edit Product Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; alt=&quot;edit&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Item in the Action Column. You should able to edit it in other language if there is other language in the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Delete Product Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Item in the Action Column&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(332,'107','p_option','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Item&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	The name will be displayed in the Product Option List in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  The Description will display in the gallery when user selects this Product Item&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Price&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Price for this Product Item&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Tax&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Tick this checkbox if you don&#039;t want system to TAX this product item&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Shipping&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Tick this checkbox if you want to exclude this product item from the shipping cost&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Purchased Quantity&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Tick this checkbox to disable the quantity field in the gallery so that user won&#039;t able to enter the quantiy when purchase this Product Item. This option can be used for instant download product or any product that don&#039;t have quantity option.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click SUBMIT button to add/update Product Item to the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: in the Edit mode you should able to edit it in other language by clicking on the language name in the Language Drop Down list.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(333,'130','p_option','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Item&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	This product item name will be used when user visits your site using this selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  This description will be used when user visits your site using this selected language.\r\n	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n    \r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(334,'128','p_option','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Category &lt;/strong&gt; &lt;strong&gt;Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	This product category name will be used when user visits your site using this selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  This description will be used when user visits your site using this selected language.\r\n	&lt;/li&gt;\r\n    \r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(335,'103','p_option','admin','Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the Delete Action&lt;br /&gt; \r\nClick on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the Delete Action',NULL,NULL),(336,'109','p_option','admin','Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the Delete Action&lt;br /&gt; \r\nClick on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the Delete Action',NULL,NULL),(337,'115','p_option','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Option Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	will be used to label the product option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	will be displayed under the Product Option Name in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Option Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;User Input&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	  Using this option to ask user to enter input for his/her purchase&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Select&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	  Using this option to	provide more options for this selected Option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Lightbox Contents&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	    Using this option to ask user for his/her lightbox content item&lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Required Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Tick this checkbox to require user input. User must enter data in order to purchase this product option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Error Message Response&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	This error will be used when Required Option is checked and user doesn\'t enter data for this option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: You should able to edit this product option in other language by click on the language name in the language drop down list (if available)&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(338,'117','p_option','admin','Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to confirm the Delete Action&lt;br /&gt; \r\nClick on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;cancel&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon to cancel the Delete Action',NULL,NULL),(339,'114','p_option','admin','Using this page to manage Product Options for selected Product Item.\r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Option Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    will be shown as Label for Product Option Fields in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  will be shown under Product Option Name\r\n	in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Type of Product Options, Lightbox Contents, Selection, or User Input&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Position&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	the order display position in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Status&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Status of Product Option. System only display it in the gallery when its status is Active.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the Global &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the bottom to add new Product Option to the system&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Option in the Action Column or Product Option Name hyperlink to add more options to that Option. You only able to add more options to particular option when its Product Type is a Selection Type.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the Action column of target Option to edit that Option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the Action column of target Option to delete that Option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: You should able to edit target Option in other language when the Edit Mode if there is other language is being added in the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(340,'121','p_option','admin','Using this page to manage Product Options for selected Product Option.\r\n\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Option Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    will be shown as Label for Product Option Fields in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  will be shown under Product Option Name\r\n	in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Type&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Type of Product Options\r\n    	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;Selection Item&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	    Where user is only able to select item in the drop down list. No more sub items will be available for this option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;More Option&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	    Where user will be see more options after select this item in the drop down list.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Price Type&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n    	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Fixed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	the input price is fixed price. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt; Multiply Product Item&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	    System will multiply input value with the Selected Product Item Price to get its price&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt; Multiply Upper Level Parent Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n       	    System will multiply input value with its one level up parent Option Price to get its price&lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Tax&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    If enable, no tax will be applied this option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Shipping&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    If enable, system won\'t charge for shipping cost for this option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Position&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	the order display position in the gallery&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Status&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	Status of Product Option. System only display it in the gallery when its status is Active.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the Global &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the bottom to add new Product Option to the system&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon of target Product Option in the Action Column or Product Option Name hyperlink to add more options to that Option. You only able to add more options to particular option when its Product Type is a Selection Type.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/edit.gif&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the Action column of target Option to edit that Option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;Click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon in the Action column of target Option to delete that Option&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: You should able to edit target Option in other language when the Edit Mode if there is other language is being added in the system.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(341,'122','p_option','admin','Using this page to add Item to selected Product Option.\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Item Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	will be used as Label for this product item&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    will be show when this option is selected&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Option Type&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n    	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Selection Item&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	No more options available when this option is selected. &lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;More Option&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	There will be more options available when this option is selected. System will allow you to add more options when this option is added to the system.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Tax&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    System will not tax user for this option if enable&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  &lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Disable Shipping&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    System will exclude shipping cost for this option if enable&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Price&lt;/strong&gt;\r\n    	&lt;ul&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Fixed&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n   	      System will use exact value that you input for its price&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Multiply Product Item by&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n   	      System will multiply input value with the Product Item Price to get its price&lt;/li&gt;\r\n        	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Multiply Upper Level Parent Option by&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n        	  System will multiply input value with the upper level product option price to get its price\r\n       	  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n       	&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n  &lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Note&lt;/strong&gt;: You should able to edit this product option in other language when there is other language is in the system.&lt;/p&gt;',NULL,NULL),(342,'134','p_option','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Item Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	will be used as Label for this product item for selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    will be show when this option is selected for selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(343,'132','p_option','admin','&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Product Item Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	will be used as Label for this product item for selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Description&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    will be used when this option is selected for selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Display Error&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  will be used\r\n	for display error for selected language&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;&Acirc;&nbsp;&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(344,'247','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;When importing multiple hi-res images, you will need to select one of the three Product Type options.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n  &lt;li&gt;All Product Types.&lt;br&gt;\r\n  System will assign all product types that you have in the Product Type Manager for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  &lt;li&gt;Only Instant Download Product Types&lt;br&gt;\r\n    System will only assign Instant Download Product Type for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n  &lt;li&gt;Only Non Instant Download Product Types.&lt;br&gt;\r\n    System will only assign Non Instant Download Product Types for imported images.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(345,'242','photographer','photographer','Using this page to global update new IPTC Metadata data to all of your images   that are currently in the database. You should only enter new data to   fields that you want to update its existing data with new value and   leave other fields that are not relevant blank. System only update   fields that have a value and keep the current data for any fields that   have a blank value.',NULL,NULL),(346,'203','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;There are two ways to add the Zoomify&amp;trade; files for a particular media&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ol&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Zoomify&amp;trade; Zip Package&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;When using this option, you must zip all files under your Zoomify&amp;trade; folder. This zip package must include the &quot;&lt;strong&gt;html&lt;/strong&gt;&quot; file and the folder containing all Zoomify&amp;trade; images. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;- Click on the &lt;strong&gt;Browse&lt;/strong&gt; button to browse to the Zoomify&amp;trade; zip file.&lt;br /&gt;- Click on the &lt;strong&gt;SUBMIT&lt;/strong&gt; button to submit the Zoomify&amp;trade; package. &lt;br /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Zoomify&amp;trade; HTTP URL&lt;/strong&gt; &lt;br /&gt;When using this option, you can enter the URL that links to your public Zoomify&amp;trade; if you have one. The system will use this URL instead of the Zoomify&amp;trade; Package.&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ol&gt;',NULL,NULL),(347,'114','photographer','photographer','&lt;p&gt;To confirm the action click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/apply.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To cancel the action click on the  &lt;img src=&quot;images/english/cancel.gif&quot; alt=&quot;&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; /&gt; icon.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL),(348,'0','logs','admin','&lt;p&gt;Welcome to Stockbox Photo Gallery Software Admin Control Panel. Using this control panel to manage your entire gallery. &lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To use particular feature simply mouseover that function button and click on any feature in the popup window when it&#039;s available.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To add shortcut to particular feature simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/add.gif&quot; alt=&quot;add&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon that is located in the bottom right corner.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n&lt;ul&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Shortcut Group Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Enter Group Name for this shortcut. System will group all shortcut with the same group in the one menu in the bottom bar&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Shortcut Name&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n    Enter Name for this shortcut. System will use display this name in the bottom bar for you to quick access to the shortcut URL&lt;/li&gt;\r\n	&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Shortcut Full URL&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;\r\n	  Enter the URL where you want system to redirect you to when click on this shortcut name.\r\nYou should the exact URL that you see in the Address Bar&lt;/li&gt;\r\n&lt;/ul&gt;\r\n&lt;p&gt;To delete particular shortcut simply click on the &lt;img src=&quot;images/admin/delete.gif&quot; alt=&quot;delete&quot; width=&quot;16&quot; height=&quot;16&quot; align=&quot;top&quot; /&gt; icon that is located in the bottom right corner. This icon only shows when you have shortcut added.&lt;/p&gt;\r\n',NULL,NULL);

--
